VW Golf 2015 Electrical Equipment Eng

Service
Repair Manual
Golf 2015 ➤
Golf Variant 2015 ➤
Electrical Equipment
Edition 12.2015
Service Department. Technical Information

Service
List of Workshop Manual Repair Groups
Repair Group
00 - General, Technical Data
27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
90 - Instruments
92 - Wiper/Washer Systems
94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
96 - Interior Lights, Switches
97 - Wiring
Technical information should always be available to the foremen and mechanics, because their
careful and constant adherence to the instructions is essential to ensure vehicle road-worthiness and
safety. In addition, the normal basic safety precautions for working on motor vehicles must, as a
matter of course, be observed.
Golf 2015 ➤ , Golf Variant 2015 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 12.2015
Contents
00 - General, Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Start/Stop System Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Safety Precautions, Road Test with Testing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 HID Headlamps Usage and Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 Repair Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.1 Contact Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.2 Wire Routing and Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1 Battery, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.2 Battery Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.1 Overview - Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2 Battery, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.4 Battery Tray, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.5 Battery, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.6 Battery, Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.7 Ground Cable with Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Removing and Installing . . 11
1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Adapting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2 Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.1 Overview - Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.3 Generator, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.4 Ribbed Belt Pulley, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.5 Voltage Regulator, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.1 Overview - Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.2 Starter, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4 Cruise Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5 Start/Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.1 General Description for Start/Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.2 Component Location Overview - Start/Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
6 Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6.1 Component Location Overview - Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6.2 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.3 Adaptive Cruise Control, Calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
7 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
90 - Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
1 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
1.1 Overview - Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
1.2 Instrument Cluster KX2 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.1 Overview - Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.2 High Tone Horn H2 / Low Tone Horn H7 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
92 - Wiper/Washer Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
1 Windshield Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Contents i
1.1 Overview - Windshield Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

1.2 Wiper, Moving Into Service Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.3 Wiper Blade, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.4 Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.5 Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1.6 Windshield Wiper Motor V , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
1.7 Windshield Wiper Motor, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
1.8 Windshield Wiper Motor, Deactivating Alternating Park Position Function . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
1.9 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
1.10 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2 Windshield Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.1 Overview - Windshield Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.2 Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2.3 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.4 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2.5 Spray Nozzles, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2.6 Spray Nozzles, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3 Rear Window Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.1 Overview - Rear Window Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.2 Wiper Blade, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.3 Windshield Wiper Arm, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.4 Wiper Arm, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.5 Rear Window Wiper Motor V12 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4 Rear Window Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.1 Overview - Rear Window Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.3 Rear Window Washer Pump, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.4 Spray Nozzle, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.5 Spray Nozzle, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5 Headlamp Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.1 Overview - Headlamp Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.3 Headlamp Washer Pump V11 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
5.4 Spray Nozzles, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
5.5 Spray Nozzles, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.6 Lift Cylinder, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
6 Washer Fluid Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.1 Washer Fluid Hoses, Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
7 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
94 - Exterior Lights, Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

1 Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
1.1 Overview - Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
1.3 Headlamp, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
1.4 Headlamp Installation Position, Correcting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
1.5 Left/Right Front Turn Signal Bulb M5 / M7 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
1.6 Headlamp Housing Repair Kit, Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
1.7 Headlamp, Changing from LHD to RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
1.8 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . 111
1.9 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
1.10 Left/Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb M30 / M32 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . 114
1.11 Left/Right HID Headlamp Bulb L13 / L14 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
1.12 Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb M1 / M3 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
1.13 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb L174 / L175 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . 118
ii Contents
1.14 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp LED Module L176 / L177 , Removing
and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
1.15 Left/Right Low Beam Headlamp Reflector Motor V294 / V295 , Removing and Installing
........................................................................ 119
1.16 Left/Right Cornering Lamp Bulb L148 / L149 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
1.17 Left/Right HID Headlamp Control Module J343 / J344 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . 120
1.18 Left/Right Headlamp Power Output Stage J667 / J668 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . 121
1.19 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module J860 / J861 , Removing
and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
1.20 Sensor for Left/Right Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor G695 / G696 , Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
1.21 Left/Right Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor V446 / V447 , Removing and Installing . . 123
1.22 Left/Right Swivel Module Position Sensor G474 / G475 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . 123
1.23 Left/Right Adaptive Cornering Lamp Motor V318 / V319 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . 124
2 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
2.1 Overview - Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
2.2 Fog Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
2.3 Left/Right Front Fog Lamp Bulb L22 / L23 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3 Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
3.1 Overview - Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
3.2 Turn Signal, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3.3 Exterior Rearview Mirror Entry Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
4 Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.1 Overview - Body Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.2 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
4.3 Rear Lid Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
4.4 Tail Lamp, Correcting Installed Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
4.5 Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4.6 Right and Left Tail Lamp Bulb M2 / M4 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
4.7 Left/Right Rear Fog Lamp Bulb L46 / L47 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4.8 Left/Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb M21 / M22 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.9 Back-Up Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4.10 Turn Signal Bulb, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
5 High-Mounted Brake Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
5.1 Overview - High-Mounted Brake Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
5.2 High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
6 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
6.1 Left/Right License Plate Lamp X4 / X5 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
6.2 Left/Right License Plate Lamp Bulb X4 / X5 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7 Access/Start Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
7.1 Component Location Overview - Access/Start Authorization System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
7.2 Component Location Overview - Keyless Access Authorization System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
7.3 Access/Start System Interface J965 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
7.4 Driver Exterior and Front Passenger Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor G415 / G416 ,
Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
7.5 Access/Start System Antenna 1 in Vehicle Interior R138 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . 173
7.6 Driver Access/Start System Antenna R134 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
7.7 Front Passenger Access/Start System Antenna R135 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . 173
7.8 Access/Start System Antenna in Luggage Compartment R137 , Removing and Installing
........................................................................ 174
7.9 Access/Start System Antenna in Rear Bumper R136 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . 175
8 Steering Column Switch Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
8.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
8.2 Lock Cylinder, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
8.3 Ignition Switch Key Lock Solenoid N376 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
8.4 Ignition/Starter Switch, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Contents iii
8.5 Steering Column Switch Module, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

8.6 Steering Column Electronics Control Module J527 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . 187
8.7 Turn Signal Switch E2 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
8.8 Cruise Control Switch E45 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
8.9 Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch E22 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
8.10 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil D2 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
8.11 Steering Lock Housing, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
9 Parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
9.1 Overview - Parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
9.2 Parking Aid Control Module J446 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
9.3 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H22 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
9.4 Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H15 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
9.5 Front Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
9.6 Rear Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
10 Parallel Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
10.1 Overview - Parallel Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
10.2 Control Module, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
10.3 Front Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
10.4 Rear Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
11 Automatic Headlamp Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
11.1 Overview - Automatic Headlamp Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
11.2 Control Module for Headlamp Range/Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range, Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
12 Trailer Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
12.1 Overview - Trailer Hitch Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
12.2 Trailer Socket U10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
12.3 Towing Recognition Control Module J345 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
13 Blind Spot Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
13.1 Overview - Blind Spot Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
13.2 Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in Left/Right Exterior Mirror K303 / K304 , Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
13.3 Blind Spot Detection Control Module J1086 / Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 J1087 ,
13.4 Blind Spot Detection, Calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
14 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
96 - Interior Lights, Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

1 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
1.1 Component Location Overview - Instrument Panel Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
1.2 Component Location Overview - Front Door Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
1.3 Component Location Overview - Rear Door Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
1.4 Component Location Overview - Center Console Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
1.5 Component Location Overview - Luggage Compartment Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
1.6 Component Location Overview - Roof Trim Panel Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
1.7 Glove Compartment Lamp W6 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
1.8 Bulb for Glove Compartment Lamp W6 , Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
1.9 Left/Right Front Footwell Lamp K268 / K269 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
1.10 Left/Right Front Footwell Illumination Bulb L151 / L152 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . 244
1.11 Central Locking -Safe- Indicator Lamp K133 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
1.12 Left/Right Front Entry Lamp W31 / W32 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
1.13 Entry Lamp Bulb, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
1.14 Driver/Front Passenger Door Warning Lamp W30 / W36 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . 246
1.15 Driver/Front Passenger Door Opener Illumination Bulb L108 / L109 , Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
1.16 Left/Right Front Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 2 L203 / L204 , Removing and Installing . . . . 247
1.17 Left/Right Rear Entry Lamp W33 / W34 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
iv Contents
1.18 Left/Right Rear Door Warning Lamp W37 / W38 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
1.19 Selector Lever Transmission Range Position Display Unit Y26 , Removing and Installing
........................................................................ 248
1.20 Luggage Compartment Lamp W3 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
1.21 Bulb for Luggage Compartment Lamp W3 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
1.22 Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp W20 / W14 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . 250
1.23 Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp W20 / W14 Bulb, Removing and Installing . . 251
1.24 Front Interior Lamp W1 Bulb, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
1.25 Rear Interior Lamp W43 Bulb, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
1.26 Left/Right Rear Reading Lamp W11 / W12 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
1.27 Left/Right Rear Interior Lamp W47 / W48 , Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
2 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
2.1 Component Location Overview - Instrument Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
2.2 Component Location Overview - Controls in Front Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
2.3 Component Location Overview - Controls in Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
2.4 Component Location Overview - Controls in Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
2.5 Component Location Overview - Controls in Luggage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
2.6 Component Location Overview - Controls in Roof Trim Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
2.7 Rotary Light Switch EX1 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
2.8 Headlamp Range Control Adjuster E102 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
2.9 Driving Profile Selection Button E735 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
2.10 Start/Stop Mode Button E693 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
2.11 ASR/ESP Button E256 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
2.12 Parking Aid Button E266 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
2.13 Parallel Parking Assistance Button E581 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
2.14 Center Console Switch Module 1 and 2 EX23 / EX30 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . 267
2.15 Emergency Flasher Switch EX3 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
2.16 Left/Right Seat Heating Button E653 / E654 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
2.17 Glove Compartment Lamp Switch E26 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
2.18 Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster EX11 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
2.19 Power Window Control Head in Driver Door E512 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . 270
2.20 Front Passenger Power Window Button E716 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
2.21 Driver Interior Locking Button E308 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
2.22 Interior Monitoring And Vehicle Inclination Deactivation Button E616 , Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
2.23 Driver and Front Passenger Door Contact Switch F2 / F3 , Removing and Installing . . . . 273
2.24 Driver and Passenger Side Rear Power Window Button E711 / E713 , Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
2.25 Left/Right Rear Door Contact Switch F10 / F11 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
2.26 Start System Button E378 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
2.27 Rear Lid Contact Switch, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
2.28 Driver and Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp Contact Switch F147 / F148 , Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
2.29 Sunroof Button E325 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
2.30 Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
2.31 Rear Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
2.32 Left/Right Front Reading Lamp Button E633 / E634 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . 277
3 Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
3.1 Overview - Interior Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
3.2 Alarm Horn H12 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
3.3 Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor G578 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
4 Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4.1 Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
5 Cigarette Lighter and Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
5.1 Overview - Converter with Socket, 12 V-230 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
5.2 Cigarette Lighter U1 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info Contents v

5.3 Socket Illumination Bulb L42 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

5.4 Rear Cigarette Lighter Illumination Bulb L32 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
5.5 Socket U , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
5.6 Converter with Socket, 12 V-230 V U13 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
6 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
97 - Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
1 Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
1.1 Component Location Overview - Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes . . . . . . . . . . 288
1.2 E-Box, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
1.3 E-Box Relay and Fuse Panels, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
1.4 Relay and Fuse Carrier Behind Instrument Panel on Driver Side, Removing and Installing
........................................................................ 294
2 Control Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
2.1 Component Location Overview - Control Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
2.2 Overview - Control Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
2.3 Overview - Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
2.4 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
2.5 Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface J533 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
2.6 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 Bracket, Removing and Installing . . . . . . 301
2.7 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 Bracket, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
2.8 Parking Aid Control Module J446 / Parallel Parking Assistance Control Module J791 Bracket,
3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
3.1 Wiring Harnesses and Connectors, Repairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
4 Connector Housings, Releasing and Disassembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
5 Antenna Wires, Repairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
6 Fiber-Optic Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
7 Vehicle Diagnostic Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
8 Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
vi Contents
00 – General, Technical Data

1 Safety Precautions
(Edition 12.2015)
⇒ “1.1 Start/Stop System Safety Precautions”, page 1
⇒ “1.2 Safety Precautions, Road Test with Testing Equipment”,
page 1
⇒ “1.3 HID Headlamps Usage and Safety Precautions”,
page 2
1.1 Start/Stop System Safety Precautions

Pay Attention to the following When Working on Vehicles with a
Start/Stop System:
WARNING
Danger of personal injury because the engine can start auto‐

matically on vehicles with Stop/Start System.
♦ If necessary, the engine can be started automatically on
vehicles with an activated Start/Stop System. A message
will appear in the instrument cluster.
♦ Make sure that the Start/Stop System is deactivated when
operating on the vehicle (turn off ignition, turn on ignition
again if necessary).
1.2 Safety Precautions, Road Test with

Testing Equipment
If Measuring Equipment Are Required during a Test Drive, Ob‐
serve the Following:
WARNING
Distraction and inadequately secured measuring equipment

poses an accident risk.
There is a risk due to deployment of the front passenger airbag
in an accident.
• Operating measuring equipment while driving creates a
distraction.
• Unsecured measuring equipment can cause injuries.
♦ Always secure measuring equipment with a strap on the
rear seat and have a second person in the rear seat op‐
erate it.
1. Safety Precautions 1
1.3 HID Headlamps Usage and Safety Pre‐

cautions
Never Change a Headlamp Bulb If You Are Not Familiar with the
Corresponding Steps, Safety Precautions and the Tool.
WARNING
Life-threatening danger due to high voltage.

♦ It is necessary to disconnect the battery wire strap before
working on HID headlamp components. These parts are
marked with yellow high voltage symbols.
♦ Then switch the low beams on and back off. This removes
any possible residual voltage.
♦ Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and re‐
move the ignition key.
♦ The HID lamp control module should never be operated
without an HID headlamp bulb.
♦ Due to the high voltage, the HID headlamp bulb can only
be operated inside the headlamp housing. When ignited,
a HID headlamp bulb operates at over 28000 V).
WARNING
Risk of injury from burning, UV rays, blinding and explosion.

♦ Due the high temperatures, absorption of UV rays, and the
risk of blinding, the HID headlamp bulb should only be op‐
erated inside the headlamp housing.
♦ Do not look into the beam of light. It may interfere with the
ability to see for a significant period of time.
♦ HID headlamp bulbs are under pressure and can crack
when bulbs are replaced.
♦ Always wear safety glasses and gloves when removing
and installing HID bulbs.
WARNING
Pollution risk.
♦ HID headlamp bulbs are hazardous waste. They contain
metallic mercury (Hg) and traces of thallium.
♦ Do not destroy HID headlamp bulbs and avoid contact with
burst glass bulbs.
♦ Observe disposal regulations.
♦ Dispose of HID headlamp bulbs in suitable containers at
an authorized collection site.
2 Rep. Gr.00 - General, Technical Data

Caution
♦ Do not touch HID headlamp bulb glass cones with bare

hands. The remaining fingerprint would evaporate due to
the heat of the operated bulb and condense on the reflec‐
tor which would impair headlamp luminosity. Use clean
cloth gloves to insert the HID headlamp bulb.
♦ Only replace faulty HID headlamp bulbs with the same
version of lamp. Bulb identification can be found on bulb
socket or on the glass cone.
♦ Connectors must engage correctly when installed and
must be checked for proper connection.
1. Safety Precautions 3
2 Repair Information
⇒ “2.1 Contact Corrosion”, page 4
⇒ “2.2 Wire Routing and Securing”, page 4
2.1 Contact Corrosion

Contact corrosion can occur if incorrect fasteners (bolts, nuts,
washers) are used.
For this reason, only fasteners with a special surface coating are
used.
In addition, rubber or plastic parts and adhesive are made of ma‐
terial that does not conduct electricity.
If there are doubts as to whether parts are suitable or not, use
new parts. Refer to Parts Catalog.
Observe:
♦ Use only original replacement parts that have been tested and
are compatible with aluminum.
♦ Use only Volkswagen accessories.
♦ Damage resulting from contact corrosion is not covered by
warranty.
2.2 Wire Routing and Securing

Wires should be marked before they are removed to prevent con‐
fusing them and to guarantee the installation position. This also
includes fuel lines, hydraulic lines, vacuum lines, EVAP systems
and electrical lines. Make sketches or take photos if necessary.
Due to the restricted space in the engine compartment, make sure
to allow for sufficient clearance to all moving or hot components
to avoid damaging the wires.
4 Rep. Gr.00 - General, Technical Data

3 Battery
⇒ “3.1 Battery, General Information”, page 5
⇒ “3.2 Battery Types”, page 5
3.1 Battery, General Information

All instructions and information on this chapter. Refer to ⇒ Elec‐
trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 27 ; Battery;
Battery - General Information .
3.2 Battery Types

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 27 ; Battery;
Battery Types .
3. Battery 5
27 – Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

1 Battery
⇒ “1.1 Overview - Battery”, page 6
⇒ “1.2 Battery, Removing and Installing”, page 7
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 9
⇒ “1.4 Battery Tray, Removing and Installing”, page 10
⇒ “1.5 Battery, Checking”, page 11
⇒ “1.6 Battery, Charging”, page 11
⇒ “1.7 Ground Cable with Battery Monitoring Control Module
J367 , Removing and Installing”, page 11
⇒ “1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Adapting”, page
12
1.1 Overview - Battery
1 - Bracket
2 - Bolt
❑ Tightening specifica‐
tion: 15 Nm
3 - Nut
tion: 6 Nm
4 - Positive Cable
❑ With battery terminal
❑ Disconnecting and con‐
necting. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Discon‐
necting and Connect‐
ing”, page 9 .
5 - Cap
❑ For positive wire
6 - Heat Shield
7 - Cover
❑ For positive terminal
8 - Cover
❑ For negative terminal
9 - Connector
❑ For Battery Monitoring
Control Module - J367-
❑ Follow the sequence
when connecting the
ground cable. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Discon‐
necting and Connect‐
ing”, page 9 .
10 - Nut
❑ Tightening specification: 9 Nm.
6 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

11 - Ground Wire
12 - Nut
❑ Tightening specification: 20 Nm
13 - Ground Wire
❑ With battery terminal and Battery Monitoring Control Module - J367-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.7 Ground Cable with Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Removing and Installing”,
page 11 .
❑ Disconnecting and connecting. Refer to ⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 9 .
❑ Adapt the Battery Monitoring Control Module - J367- . Refer to
⇒ “1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Adapting”, page 12
14 - Battery - A-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “1.2 Battery, Removing and Installing”, page 7 .
❑ Disconnecting and connecting. Refer to ⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 9 .
❑ Replacing on a vehicle with the Start/Stop System ⇒ page 8
15 - Battery Tray
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “1.4 Battery Tray, Removing and Installing”, page 10 .
16 - Nut
17 - Bolt
❑ Quantity: 3
1.2 Battery, Removing and Installing

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-
WARNING
Pay attentions when working on the battery to the warning

messages and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equip‐
ment General Information; Rep. Gr. 27 ; Battery .
Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Remove the ignition key, if equipped.
– Open the heat protection sleeve cover.
1. Battery 7
– Open the cover -4- over the battery negative terminal.

– Loosen the nut -6- a few turns and disconnect the battery
ground cable terminal clamp -5- from the battery negative ter‐
minal.
– Open the cover -3- over the battery positive terminal.
– Loosen the nut -2- several turns and remove the battery pos‐
itive cable terminal -1- from the battery positive terminal.
– Pull the heat protection sleeve -4- slightly upward.
– Remove the bolt -2- from the bracket -1-.
– Remove the bracket -1-.
– Remove the Battery - A- -3- in the direction of travel from the

battery tray and lift it upward out of the engine compartment.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal while paying attention to
the following:
Caution
If the battery is not secured properly, the following risks can

occur:
♦ Shortened service life due to vibration damage (explosion
hazard).
♦ If the battery is not secured properly, the plates within the
battery can be damaged.
♦ Damage to the battery housing caused by bracket (pos‐
sible electrolyte leakage, high subsequent costs).
♦ Inadequate crash safety.
Only maintenance-free batteries conforming to standards

“TL82506” (from December 1997) and “VW75073” (from August
2001) may be installed. Refer to the Parts Catalog.
Batteries from the replacement parts program have a base strip
adapter for adapting to different clamping strips. Information on
whether and how to use the base strip adapter. Refer to the Bat‐
tery Owner's Manual.
Vehicles with Start/Stop System
Vehicles with the Start/Stop System have a special Battery - A-
due to the increased load on the cycles.
When replacing the Battery - A- , pay attention to the replacement
part identification. Refer to the Parts Catalog.
Batteries for vehicles with the Start/Stop System have “AGM” (Ab‐
sorbent Glass Mat) or “EFB” (Enhanced Flooded Battery) marked
on them.
Continuation for All Vehicles

– Insert the Battery - A- into the battery tray -1- so that the battery
base strip touches the rear and side stop -arrows-.
• It must not be possible to slide the Battery - A- rearward or to
the side.
– Install the bracket -1-.

• The tab -arrow- on the bracket -1- must fit into the opening on
the battery clamping strip.
– Tighten the bolt -2- for the bracket -1-.
– Checking the Battery - A- for secure seating.
Turn off the Ignition and All Electrical Consumers, and Connect
the Battery - A- in the Following Sequence:
– Install the battery positive cable terminal -3- on the battery
positive terminal “+”.
– Tighten the nut -4-.
– Connect the Battery - A- . Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 9 .
When the battery is replaced the Battery Monitoring Control Mod‐
ule - J367- must be adapted. Refer to
⇒ “1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Adapting”, page
12 .
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “1.1 Overview - Battery”, page 6
1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting

Caution
Follow all safety precautions when working on pyrotechnic

components:
♦ When working on pyrotechnic components (airbag, belt
tensioner), it is necessary to disconnect the battery with
the ignition turned on, contrary to the following descrip‐
tion . Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 00 ; Safety
Precautions; Pyrotechnic Components Safety Precau‐
tions .
Disconnecting
– Open the heat protection sleeve cover.
– Open the cover -1- over the battery negative terminal.
1. Battery 9
– Loosen the nut -3- several turns and remove the battery
ground cable terminal clamp -2- from the battery terminal.
Connecting
Pay attention to the following when disconnecting the Battery -
A- .
– Release and disconnect the connector -2- from the Battery

Monitoring Control Module - J367- -3-.
– Install the battery ground cable terminal clamp by hand on the
battery negative terminal “–”.
– Tighten the nut -1- to the tightening specification.
– Reconnect the connector -2- to the Battery Monitoring Control
Module - J367- .
– Turn on the ignition.
– Check the time and if necessary adjust.
– Window, open and close all the way.
– Then, with the windows closed, pull the power window switch
until the relay audibly switches.
– Check the window regulator convenience switch.
While comfort switching is operated, window must close without
holding the power window switch.
Note
After connecting the power supply, the ASR/ESP Indicator Lamp

- K155- may only go out after the vehicle has been driven a few
yards.
1.4 Battery Tray, Removing and Installing

Removing
– If necessary, remove the air filter housing. Refer to ⇒ Rep.
Gr. 23 ; Air Filter; Air Filter Housing, Removing and Installing
or ⇒ Rep. Gr. 24 ; Air Filter; Air Filter Housing, Removing and
Installing .
– Remove the Battery - A- . Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Battery, Removing and Installing”, page 7 .

– Free up the wiring harness from the battery tray -arrows-.
– Remove the bolts and nut -2-.

– Remove the battery tray -1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
1.5 Battery, Checking

Checking the battery. Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General
Information; Rep. Gr. 27 ; Battery, Checking .
The Battery - A- is checked in the Data Bus On Board Diagnostic
Interface - J533- OBD using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester in
“Guided Fault Finding” mode.
1.6 Battery, Charging

Battery charging. Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Infor‐
mation; Rep. Gr. 27 ; Battery, Charging .
1.7 Ground Cable with Battery Monitoring

Control Module - J367- , Removing and
Installing
Removing
– Remove the Battery - A- . Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Battery, Removing and Installing”, page 7 .
1. Battery 11
– Release and disconnect the connector -2- from the Battery

– Remove the nut -1- for the ground cable -2-.

– Remove the nut -3- and remove the ground cable with Battery
Installing
the following:
– Adapt the Battery Monitoring Control Module - J367- . Refer
to
⇒ “1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Adapting”,
page 12 .
1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module -

J367- , Adapting
After installing a new start battery or a new Battery Monitoring
Control Module - J367- the Battery Monitoring Control Module -
J367- must be adapted.
– Adapt the Battery Monitoring Control Module - J367- using the
Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

2 Generator
⇒ “2.1 Overview - Generator”, page 13
⇒ “2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing”, page 15
⇒ “2.3 Generator, Checking”, page 22
⇒ “2.4 Ribbed Belt Pulley, Removing and Installing”, page 22
⇒ “2.5 Voltage Regulator, Removing and Installing”, page 27
2.1 Overview - Generator

⇒ “2.1.1 Overview - Generator without Bushings”, page 13
⇒ “2.1.2 Overview - Generator with Bushings”, page 14
2.1.1 Overview - Generator without Bushings
1 - Bolt
❑ 23 Nm
❑ Quantity: 4
2 - Generator - C-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Generator, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 15 .
❑ Checking. Refer to
⇒ “2.3 Generator,
Checking”, page 22 .
❑ Ribbed belt pulley, re‐
moving and installing.
Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Ribbed Belt Pul‐
ley, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 22 .
❑ Voltage Regulator -
C1- , removing and in‐
stalling. Refer to
⇒ “2.5 Voltage Regula‐
tor, Removing and In‐
3 - Connector
4 - Terminal 30/B+
5 - Cap
6 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
2. Generator 13
2.1.2 Overview - Generator with Bushings
1 - Generator - C-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Generator, Re‐
page 15 .
❑ Checking. Refer to
⇒ “2.3 Generator,
Checking”, page 22 .
❑ Ribbed belt pulley, re‐
Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Ribbed Belt Pul‐
ley, Removing and In‐
❑ Voltage Regulator -
C1- , Removing and in‐
stalling. Refer to
⇒ “2.5 Voltage Regula‐
tor, Removing and In‐
2 - Bolt
❑ 23 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
3 - Bushing
❑ Quantity: 2
❑ Because the clamping
force of a tight bushing
is too low despite the
correct torque, loosen
the bushings
4 - Connector
5 - Cap
6 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
7 - Terminal 30/B+
8 - Nut
❑ 3.2 Nm
❑ Not installed in all vehicles
9 - Wire Clamp
10 - Threaded Pin
❑ 3.2 Nm

2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing

⇒ “2.2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing, Vehicles with 2.0L
TSI Engine”, page 16
⇒ “2.2.3 Generator, Removing and Installing, Vehicles with 1.8L
TSI-Engine”, page 18
⇒ “2.2.5 Generator, Removing and Installing, Vehicles with TDI
Engine”, page 20
2.2.1 Generator, Removing and Installing,

1.4L TSI Engine
Removing
– Disconnect the Battery - A- . Refer to
– Remove the ribbed belt. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 13 ; Cylinder
Block, Belt Pulley Side; Ribbed Belt, Removing and Installing .
– Remove the ribbed belt tensioner. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 13 ;
Cylinder Block, Belt Pulley Side; Ribbed Belt Tensioner, Re‐
moving and Installing .
Vehicles with A/C System
Caution
Danger of damaging the A/C compressor, the refrigerant line

and hoses.
♦ Do not stretch, bend or kink the refrigerant lines and ho‐
ses.
– Remove the A/C compressor from the bracket. Refer to ⇒

Heating and Air Conditioning; Rep. Gr. 87 ; A/C Compressor;
A/C Compressor, Removing and Installing on Bracket .
– Secure the A/C compressor on the lock carrier so that the re‐
frigerant lines are not under tension.
– Remove the bolts -arrows-.
If the Generator - C- -1- sticks in the bracket, install screw again
down as far as the last two turns.
Carefully strike on bolt heads using flat side of hammer - doing
this loosens the generator mount bushings.
– Remove the Generator - C- -1- with the wires still attached
from the bracket.
– Disconnect the connector -3-.
– Pry off the cap -2-.
– Remove the nut and remove the terminal 30/B+ -4-.
2. Generator 15
– Remove the Generator - C- -1- downward and to the right.

Installing
the following:
– Move the bolt sleeves slightly to the rear to make it easier to
install the Generator - C- .
Tight bushings for generator mount must be made smooth-run‐
ning, otherwise clamping force of bushing is too little despite
correct torque.
– After completing work always start the engine and check the
belt routing.
♦ Refer to
2.2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing, Ve‐

hicles with 2.0L TSI Engine
♦ Engine Bung Set - VAS6122-
Removing
– Remove fan shroud. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 19 ; Radiator/Cool‐
ant Fan; Fan Shroud, Removing and Installing .
– Remove the bolts -1 and 2-.

– Detach the hose clamps -1 and 2- and remove the air hose.
– Seal the open lines and connections with clean plugs from the
-VAS6122- .
– Free up the coolant hose -3-.

– Loosen the hose clamp -2-.
– Release and disconnect the connector -1-.
– Remove the right air pipe.
Caution

and hoses.
ses.

2. Generator 17
– Free up the wiring harness -arrow-.

– Remove the bolts -5 and 6- and bring the Generator - C- -4-
forward.
– Remove the Generator - C- -4- downward to the center of the
vehicle.
Installing
the following:
belt routing.
♦ Refer to

hicles with 1.8L TSI-Engine
Removing


– Move aside the coolant pipe -1-.

– Pivot the Generator - C- -3- in the direction of travel.

– Pry off the cap -2- and remove the underlying nuts.
– Remove the terminal 30/B+ -3-.
– Remove the Generator - C- -4- upward from the vehicle.
Installing
the following:
♦ Refer to

hicles with 1.6L MPI Engine
Removing
Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info
2. Generator 19
Vehicles with A/C system
Caution

and hoses.
ses.

Continuation for all vehicles
from the bracket.

Installing
the following:
correct torque.
belt routing.
♦ Refer to

hicles with TDI Engine

Removing
Caution

and hoses.
ses.

from the bracket.
– Remove the nut -6- and remove the wire clamp -2-.
Installing
the following:
correct torque.
belt routing.
♦ Refer to
2. Generator 21
2.3 Generator, Checking

– Check the Generator - C- using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .
2.4 Ribbed Belt Pulley, Removing and In‐

stalling
⇒ “2.4.1 Ribbed Belt Pulley without Freewheel, Removing and
Installing”, page 22
⇒ “2.4.2 Ribbed Belt Pulley with Freewheel, Removing and In‐
stalling, Bosch”, page 22
⇒ “2.4.3 Ribbed Belt Pulley with Freewheel, Removing and In‐
stalling, Valeo”, page 24
⇒ “2.4.4 Decoupling Belt Pulley with Freewheel, Removing and
2.4.1 Ribbed Belt Pulley without Freewheel,

Removing and Installing
♦ Generator Belt Socket - 3310-
Removing
– Remove the Generator - C- . Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing”, page 15 .
– Secure the Generator - C- in a vise by the mounting points.
– Remove the ribbed belt pulley nut using -3310- from the gen‐
erator shaft.
– Remove the ribbed belt pulley from the generator shaft.
Installing
the following:
Component Tightening Specification
Ribbed belt pulley nut 65 Nm
2.4.2 Ribbed Belt Pulley with Freewheel, Re‐

moving and Installing, Bosch
♦ Multi-Tooth Adapter - 3400-
Removing

– Pry up the cap from the ribbed belt pulley.

– Install the -3400- with the wrench (SW 17) in the ribbed belt
pulley.
– Install the multi-point socket M10 -1- in the generator shaft.
– Hold the generator secure and loosen the ribbed belt pulley
with the wrench by turning left.
– Hold the ribbed belt pulley securely by hand.
– Turn the generator shaft until the ribbed belt pulley can be re‐
moved.
Installing
the following:
– Install the ribbed belt pulley by hand until stop on the generator
shaft.
The -VAG1332- must be rearranged for installing ribbed belt pul‐
ley as follows:
– Release the insert -1- and remove it from the handle part -2-.
– Turn the handle part -2- 180° and install the socket -1- again.
– Set the rotation direction of the -VAG1332- bit to the left.
– Install the multi-point socket M10 -1- in the generator shaft.

– Counterhold the -3400- with a wrench (SW 17).
– Tighten the ribbed belt pulley by turning the generator shaft to
the left using -VAG1332- .
2. Generator 23
2.4.3 Ribbed Belt Pulley with Freewheel, Re‐

moving and Installing, Valeo
♦ Torx Key Socket Set - VAG1603A/1-
Removing
– Pry up the cap from the ribbed belt pulley.
– Install the -3400- with the wrench (SW 17) in the ribbed belt
pulley.
– Install the -VAG1603A/1- in the generator shaft.
– Hold the generator secure and loosen the ribbed belt pulley
with the wrench by turning left.
– Hold the ribbed belt pulley securely by hand.
– Turn the generator shaft until the ribbed belt pulley can be re‐
moved.
Installing
the following:
– Install the ribbed belt pulley by hand until stop on the generator
shaft.
The -VAG1332- must be rearranged for installing ribbed belt pul‐
ley as follows:
– Turn the handle part -2- 180° and install the socket -1- again.
– Set the rotation direction of the -VAG1332- bit to the left.

– Install the -VAG1603A/1- in the generator shaft.

– Counterhold the -3400- with a wrench (SW 17).
– Tighten the ribbed belt pulley by turning the generator shaft to
the left using -VAG1332- .
Component Tightening specification
2.4.4 Decoupling Belt Pulley with Freewheel,

♦ Adapter - T10474-
General Information
There are different decoupling belt pulley with freewheel.
Before removing check which special tool must be used for the
removal of the decoupling belt pulley with freewheel.
Caution
The length of the ribbed belt is different depending on the de‐

coupling belt pulley with freewheel installed.
Check which decoupling belt pulley with freewheel is installed
and make sure that the correct ribbed belt will be installed.
Ribbed belt allocation. Refer to the Parts Catalog.
Decoupler Differences
-A- small decoupling belt pulley with freewheel, special tool to be
used -T10474-
2. Generator 25
-B- large decoupling belt pulley with freewheel, special tool to be

used -3400-
Note
The ribbed belt for the large decoupling belt pulley with freewheel
must be longer, because the decoupling belt pulley with freewheel
has a larger diameter and it is different for vehicles with and with‐
out an A/C system.
Removing
– If equipped, remove the protective cap from the decoupling
belt pulley with freewheel.
– Install the -T10474- or -3400- -1- in the belt pulley and attach
a wrench (SW 17).
– Install the -VAG1603A/1- -2- in the generator shaft.
– Turn the generator shaft clockwise to loosen and while doing
so counterhold with the wrench.
– Hold the decoupling belt pulley with freewheel in place by hand
and turn it at the generator shaft until the decoupling belt pulley
with freewheel can be removed.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal. Note the following:
The -VAG1332- must be rearranged for installing the decoupling
belt pulley with freewheel as follows:
– Turn the handle part -2- of the torque wrench 180° and reinsert
the socket.
– Set the rotation direction of the torque wrench socket to “left”.
– Next, screw the ribbed belt pulley with freewheel by hand onto
the generator shaft until stop.

– Insert the -T10474- or the -3400- -1- into the decoupling belt
pulley with freewheel and attach a wrench.
– Install the -VAG1603A/1- -2- in the generator shaft.
– Turn the generator shaft using the -VAG1332- -3- counter
clockwise to tighten the decoupling belt pulley with freewheel.
Decoupling belt pulley nut 80 Nm
2.5 Voltage Regulator, Removing and In‐

stalling
⇒ “2.5.1 Voltage Regulator, Removing and Installing, Bosch”,
page 27
⇒ “2.5.2 Voltage Regulator, Removing and Installing, Valeo”,
page 28
2.5.1 Voltage Regulator, Removing and In‐

stalling, Bosch
♦ Angled Screwdriver - VAS6416-
♦ Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624-
Removing
– Carefully pry out the cap -1- from the retainers in direction of
-arrows- using the -VAS6416- .
– Remove the screws -arrows- for the Voltage Regulator - C1- .
2. Generator 27
– Remove the Voltage Regulator - C1- from the Generator - C- .

Installing
the following:
Voltage Regulator - C1- screws 2 Nm
2.5.2 Voltage Regulator, Removing and In‐

stalling, Valeo
Removing
– Carefully pry the cap -1- off of the Generator - C- .
– Remove the screws -2- for the Voltage Regulator - C1- -3-.
– Remove the Voltage Regulator - C1- -3- from the Generator -
C- .
Installing
the following:
– Install the Voltage Regulator - C1- .

– Press the cap on the carbon brushes -A- down in direction of

-arrow- until it is flush with the voltage regulator housing.
– Install new cap -1- on the Generator - C- .
Voltage Regulator - C1- screws 4 Nm
2. Generator 29
3 Starter
⇒ “3.1 Overview - Starter”, page 30
⇒ “3.2 Starter, Removing and Installing”, page 33
3.1 Overview - Starter

⇒ “3.1.1 Overview - Starter, Vehicles with Manual Transmission”,
page 30
⇒ “3.1.2 Overview - Starter, Vehicles with DSG Transmission
DQ200–7F”, page 31
DQ250-6F”, page 32
⇒ “3.1.4 Overview - Starter, Vehicles with Automatic Transmis‐
sion”, page 33
3.1.1 Overview - Starter, Vehicles with Manual Transmission
1 - Starter - B-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “3.2.1 Starter, Re‐
moving and Installing,
Vehicles with Manual
Transmission”,
page 33 .
2 - Double Bolt
❑ 80 Nm
3 - Ground Cable
❑ Depending on the vehi‐
cle equipment level
4 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
cle equipment level
5 - Connector
6 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
7 - Cap
8 - Terminal 30/B+
9 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
cle equipment level
10 - Ground Cable
cle equipment level
11 - Bracket
❑ For the wiring harness

3.1.2 Overview - Starter, Vehicles with DSG Transmission DQ200–7F
1 - Starter - B-
ling. Refer to
Vehicles with DSG
Transmission DQ200–
7F”, page 35 .
2 - Double Bolt
❑ 80 Nm
3 - Ground Cable
4 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
5 - Connector
6 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
7 - Cap
8 - Terminal 30/B+
9 - Bolt
❑ 80 Nm
3. Starter 31
3.1.3 Overview - Starter, Vehicles with DSG Transmission DQ250-6F
1 - Starter - B-
ling. Refer to
Vehicles with DSG
Transmission
DQ250-6F”, page 36 .
2 - Bolt
❑ 40 Nm
3 - Connector
4 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
5 - Cap
6 - Terminal 30/B+
7 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
8 - Ground Cable
9 - Double bolt
❑ 40 Nm

3.1.4 Overview - Starter, Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
1 - Starter - B-
ling. Refer to
Vehicles with Automatic
Transmission”,
page 37 .
2 - Double Bolt
❑ 80 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
3 - Bracket
4 - Connector
5 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
6 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
7 - Cap
8 - Terminal 30/B+
9 - Bracket
3.2 Starter, Removing and Installing

⇒ “3.2.1 Starter, Removing and Installing, Vehicles with Manual
Transmission”, page 33
⇒ “3.2.2 Starter, Removing and Installing, Vehicles with DSG
Transmission DQ200–7F”, page 35
⇒ “3.2.3 Starter, Removing and Installing, Vehicles with DSG
Transmission DQ250-6F”, page 36
⇒ “3.2.4 Starter, Removing and Installing, Vehicles with Automat‐
ic Transmission”, page 37
3.2.1 Starter, Removing and Installing, Vehi‐

cles with Manual Transmission
3. Starter 33
Removing
– Remove the noise insulation. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.
Gr. 66 ; Noise Insulation; Overview - Noise Insulation .
Installing .
– Remove the cap -2-.
– Remove the nuts -3-, and terminal 30/B+.
– If equipped remove the nut -1- from the Starter - B- upper bolt.
– If equipped remove the ground cable -2-.
– If equipped remove the nut -1- from the Starter - B- lower bolt.
– If equipped remove the ground cable -2-.
Note
The wires remain connected.
– Remove the nut -4- and remove the wiring harness bracket
-1-.
– Remove the Starter - B- -3- bolts -2 and 5- .

– Remove the Starter - B- -3- downward.

Installing
the following:
♦ Refer to
⇒ “3.1.1 Overview - Starter, Vehicles with Manual Transmis‐
sion”, page 30

cles with DSG Transmission DQ200–7F
Removing
Installing .
– Remove the nut -1- from the upper bolt of the Starter - B- .
– Remove the ground cable -2-.
– Remove the nut -6- and terminal 30/B+.
– Remove the Starter - B- -3- bolts -1 and 2-.
3. Starter 35
– Remove the Starter - B- -3- upward.

Installing
the following:
♦ Refer to
DQ200–7F”, page 31

cles with DSG Transmission DQ250-6F
Removing
Installing .
– Remove the nut -2- from the lower bolt for the Starter - B-
-1-.
– Remove the ground cable -3-.
– Remove the Starter - B- -1- bolt -4-.
– Remove the nut -5- and terminal 30/B+.
– Remove the bolt -1- for the Starter - B- -2-.

– Remove the Starter - B- -2- upward.

Installing
the following:
♦ Refer to
DQ250-6F”, page 32

cles with Automatic Transmission
Removing
– Remove the nut -2-.
– Remove the bracket -1- for the wiring harness.
– Remove the bolt -1-.

Gr. 24 ; Air Filter; Air Filter Housing, Removing and Installing .
3. Starter 37
– Slide the cap -1- in the direction of the arrow in direction of

-A-.

– Remove the nut -3- and remove terminal 30/B+ -2-.
– Remove the bracket -1- for the wiring harness.

– Remove the Starter - B- -2- upward from the vehicle.

Installing
the following:
♦ Refer to
⇒ “3.1.4 Overview - Starter, Vehicles with Automatic Trans‐
mission”, page 33

4 Cruise Control System

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 27 ; Cruise Con‐
trol System .
4. Cruise Control System 39

5 Start/Stop System
⇒ “5.1 General Description for Start/Stop System”, page 40
⇒ “5.2 Component Location Overview - Start/Stop System”, page
40
5.1 General Description for Start/Stop Sys‐

tem
The Start/Stop System reduces fuel consumption by turning off
the engine when the vehicle is at a standstill and turning the en‐
gine back on when the driver starts to drive. The Stop/Start
System works automatically. As soon as the vehicle is driven for
approximately four seconds at a minimum of 3 km/h (2 mph).
5.2 Component Location Overview - Start/Stop System

Pay attention to the safety precautions. Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Start/Stop System Safety Precautions”, page 1 .
1 - Start/Stop Mode Button -

E693-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.10 Start/Stop
Mode Button E693 , Re‐
page 266 .
2 - Bracket
❑ For Vehicle Electrical
System Control Module
- J519-
3 - Vehicle Electrical System
❑ Overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Overview - Con‐
trol Modules”,
page 298 .

6 Adaptive Cruise Control

⇒ “6.1 Component Location Overview - Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)”, page 41
⇒ “6.2 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Removing and
⇒ “6.3 Adaptive Cruise Control, Calibrating”, page 45
6.1 Component Location Overview - Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
1 - Instrument Cluster - KX2-

❑ With Instrument Cluster
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Instrument Clus‐
ter KX2 , Removing and
Installing”, page 49 .
2 - Front Bumper Carrier
3 - Retaining Plate
ling. Refer to
⇒ “6.2.2 Adaptive
Cruise Control Module,
Removing and Instal‐
ling, from the Retaining
Plate”, page 43 .
4 - Quick Release
❑ Quantity: 3
❑ Replace after removal
5 - Adapter Frame
❑ Serves as the mount for
the Distance Regulation
❑ With Distance Regula‐
tion Control Module -
J428- adjusting screw
❑ Measure the adjustment
dimension and adjust if
necessary. Refer to
⇒ Fig. ““Adjusting
Screws, Adjusting”“ ,
page 44 .
6 - Distance Regulation Con‐
trol Module - J428-
⇒ “6.2.1 Adaptive Cruise Control Module, Removing and Installing, with Retaining Plate”, page 42 .
❑ Calibrating. Refer to ⇒ “6.3 Adaptive Cruise Control, Calibrating”, page 45 .
7 - Connector
8 - Radar Sensor Trim
9 - Bolt
❑ 8 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
6. Adaptive Cruise Control 41

10 - Adaptive Cruise Control Button - E357-

❑ Is integrated in the multifunction steering wheel.
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Communication; Rep. Gr. 91 ; Multifunction Steering Wheel; Right
and Left Multifunction Buttons on Steering Wheel - E441- / - E440- , Removing and Installing .
6.2 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise

Control, Removing and Installing
⇒ “6.2.1 Adaptive Cruise Control Module, Removing and Instal‐
ling, with Retaining Plate”, page 42
⇒ “6.2.2 Adaptive Cruise Control Module, Removing and Instal‐
ling, from the Retaining Plate”, page 43
⇒ “6.2.3 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Removing
and Installing at Adapter Frame”, page 44
6.2.1 Adaptive Cruise Control Module, Re‐

moving and Installing, with Retaining
Plate
Caution
This procedure contains mandatory replaceable parts. Refer

to component overview and parts catalog prior to starting pro‐
cedure.
Mandatory Replacement Parts

♦ Quick Release - Adapter Frame to Distance Regulation Con‐
trol Module
If the control module is being replaced, use the Vehicle Diagnostic
Tester and select the “Replacing” function for the respective con‐
trol module in “Guided Fault Finding”.
Removing
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63 ; Front Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing .
– Remove the screws -1-.
– Remove the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- with
retaining plate -3-.


Installing
the following:
– Calibrate the adaptive cruise control. Refer to
⇒ “6.3 Adaptive Cruise Control, Calibrating”, page 45 .
♦ Refer to
⇒ “6.1 Component Location Overview - Adaptive Cruise Con‐
trol (ACC)”, page 41
6.2.2 Adaptive Cruise Control Module, Re‐

moving and Installing, from the Retain‐
ing Plate
♦ Digital Caliper - VAS6335-
Caution
This procedure contains mandatory replaceable parts. Refer

to component overview prior to starting procedure.
Mandatory Replacement Parts

♦ Quick Release - ACC adapter frame to retaining plate
Removing
– Remove the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- . Re‐
fer to
⇒ “6.2.1 Adaptive Cruise Control Module, Removing and In‐
stalling, with Retaining Plate”, page 42 .
– Turn the quick-release fasteners -2- in direction of -arrow-.
– Remove the retaining plate -3- from the Distance Regulation
Control Module - J428- -4-.
– Remove the quick-release fasteners -2- from the adjusting
screws -1-.
Installing
the following:
– Replace the quick-release fasteners -2-.
The adjusting screws -1- in the adapter frame are pre-set. If nec‐
essary, correct the setting. Refer to
⇒ Fig. ““Adjusting Screws, Adjusting”“ , page 44 .

Adjusting Screws, Adjusting

– Using the -VAS6335- measure the adjustment dimension -a-
on all adjusting screws and adjust where necessary.
♦ Dimension -a- = 40.3 mm ± 0.5 mm
– Push in new quick-release fasteners -2- on the adjusting

screws and fixed bearing on the adapter frame -3-.
– Install the retaining plate -1- on the quick-release fasteners
-2-.
– Turn the quick-release fasteners -2- on the back of the retain‐
ing plate -1- in the direction of the -arrow A- until stop.
– Install the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- . Refer
to
6.2.3 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise

Control, Removing and Installing at
Adapter Frame
Removing
– Remove the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- . Re‐
fer to

– Loosen the catches -1- on both sides in the direction of the

-arrow A-.
– Remove the rain sensor trim -2-.
– Loosen the locking mechanisms -1- in the direction of the
-arrow A-.
– Fold out the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- -3-
in the direction of the -arrow B-.
– Remove the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- -3-

from the adapter frame -2-.
Installing
the following:
6.3 Adaptive Cruise Control, Calibrating

Conditions
– The Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- must be cali‐
brated during the following conditions:
♦ Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- was removed and
installed or replaced.
♦ Bumping into the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428-
when not cautiously assembling the front bumper cover.
♦ Damage to the front bumper cover due to an accident or
something similar.
♦ The front bumper carrier was remove and installed or re‐
placed.
♦ Rear axle toe was adjusted.
Too great of a horizontal adjustment of the Distance Regulation
Control Module - J428- causes the ACC/Front Assist functions to
remain switched off. This will show the following message in the
Instrument Cluster - KX2- : ACC/Front Assist not availa-
ble .
A limited sensor view due to a dirty sensor or inclement weather

conditions such as heavy rain, snowfall or iced-over sensor cau‐
ses the ACC/Front Assist functions to be temporarily unavailable.
This is indicated by the following message in the Instrument Clus‐
ter - KX2- : ACC/Front Assist: No sensor view .
– Calibrate the adaptive cruise control. Refer to ⇒ Suspension,
Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 44 ; Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC); Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Calibrating .

7 Special Tools
♦ Adapter - T10474-

♦ Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624-
♦ Engine Bung Set - VAS6122-
♦ Angled Screwdriver - VAS6416-
7. Special Tools 47
♦ Generator Belt Socket - 3310-
♦ Digital Caliper - VAS6335-

90 – Instruments
1 Instrument Cluster
⇒ “1.1 Overview - Instrument Cluster”, page 49
⇒ “1.2 Instrument Cluster KX2 , Removing and Installing”,
page 49
1.1 Overview - Instrument Cluster
1 - Connector
❑ For the instrument clus‐
ter
2 - Instrument Cluster - KX2-
❑ With Instrument Cluster
❑ If a LED indicator lamp
or instrument cluster il‐
lumination is faulty, the
instrument cluster must
be replaced
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Instrument Clus‐
ter KX2 , Removing and
3 - Instrument Cluster Trim
ling. Refer to ⇒ Body
Interior; Rep. Gr. 70 ;
Instrument Panel; In‐
strument Cluster Trim,
ling .
4 - Upper Steering Column
Trim Panel
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒
Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
68 ; Storage Compart‐
ments and Covers;
Overview - Steering
Column Trim Panel .
5 - Screw
❑ 3 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
1.2 Instrument Cluster - KX2- , Removing

and Installing
General Information
All indicator lamps in the Instrument Cluster - KX2- have LEDs.
LEDs cannot be replaced separately if faulty. The Instrument
Cluster - KX2- must be replaced.
The following components are integrated inside the Instrument
Cluster - KX2- :
1. Instrument Cluster 49
♦ Instrument Cluster Control Module - J285-

♦ Fuel Gauge - G1-
♦ Speedometer - G21-
♦ Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge - G3-
♦ Tachometer - G5-
♦ Indicator lamps
Do not disassemble the Instrument Cluster - KX2- .
Removing
For better illustration the steering wheel is not shown. It is not
necessary to remove the steering wheel in order to remove the
Instrument Cluster - KX2- .
– Position the steering wheel as far back as possible. Use the
entire adjustment range of the steering column adjustment for
this.
– Remove the upper steering column trim panel. Refer to ⇒
Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Cov‐
ers; Upper Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and In‐
stalling .
– Remove the instrument cluster trim -1-. Refer to ⇒ Body In‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 70 ; Instrument Panel; Instrument Cluster
Trim, Removing and Installing .
Note
The Instrument Cluster - KX2- is engaged in the instrument panel.

For removal greater force is necessary.
– Remove the Instrument Cluster - KX2- -2- until it contacts the

steering wheel.
– Disengage the connector and disconnect.
– To disconnect push the circlip -1- on the connector.

– Pivot the retaining bracket in the direction of -arrow- and re‐
move from the connector.
– Remove the Instrument Cluster - KX2- on the front passenger
side between the steering wheel and the instrument panel.
Installing
♦ Refer to ⇒ “1.1 Overview - Instrument Cluster”, page 49
50 Rep. Gr.90 - Instruments

2 Horn
⇒ “2.1 Overview - Horn”, page 51
⇒ “2.2 High Tone Horn H2 / Low Tone Horn H7 , Removing and
2.1 Overview - Horn
Note
The Sedan is shown. The Wagon is identical.
1 - Bracket
❑ For the horn
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 High Tone Horn
H2 / Low Tone Horn H7 ,
ling”, page 51 .
2 - Bolt
❑ 18 Nm
3 - Nut
❑ 9 Nm
4 - Horn
❑ High Tone Horn - H2- is
installed on the left
❑ Low Tone Horn - H7- in
installed on the right
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 High Tone Horn
H2 / Low Tone Horn H7 ,
ling”, page 51 .
5 - Connector
2.2 High Tone Horn - H2- / Low Tone Horn

- H7- , Removing and Installing
The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.
Removing
2. Horn 51

– Remove the horn -3- from the bracket.
Installing
♦ Refer to ⇒ “2.1 Overview - Horn”, page 51
Bracket with Horn, Removing
– Remove the bracket with the horn -3-.

Install the Bracket and Horn.
♦ Refer to ⇒ “2.1 Overview - Horn”, page 51
52 Rep. Gr.90 - Instruments

92 – Wiper/Washer Systems
1 Windshield Wiper System
⇒ “1.1 Overview - Windshield Wiper System”, page 53
⇒ “1.2 Wiper, Moving Into Service Position”, page 56
⇒ “1.3 Wiper Blade, Removing and Installing”, page 56
⇒ “1.4 Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and Installing”,
page 57
⇒ “1.5 Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting”, page 58
⇒ “1.6 Windshield Wiper Motor V , Removing and Installing”,
page 59
⇒ “1.7 Windshield Wiper Motor, Replacing”, page 60
⇒ “1.8 Windshield Wiper Motor, Deactivating Alternating Park Po‐
sition Function”, page 61
⇒ “1.9 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Removing and Installing”,
page 62
⇒ “1.10 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servicing”, page 66
1.1 Overview - Windshield Wiper System

⇒ “1.1.1 Overview - Windshield Wiper System”, page 53
⇒ “1.1.2 Overview - Windshield Wiper Motor and Windshield Wip‐
er Frame”, page 55
1.1.1 Overview - Windshield Wiper System
1. Windshield Wiper System 53

1 - Front Passenger Side Wip‐

er Blade
❑ Different lengths. Refer
to the Parts Catalog.
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Wiper Blade, Re‐
page 56 .
2 - Driver Side Windshield Wip‐
er Blade
ling. Refer to
page 56 .
3 - Driver Side Wiper Arm
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Windshield Wiper
Arms, Removing and In‐
❑ Adjusting. Refer to
Arms, Adjusting”,
page 58 .
4 - Cap
5 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
6 - Bolt
❑ Tightening specification and sequence. Refer to
⇒ Fig. ““Tightening Specifications and Sequence for the Windshield Wiper Motor -V- ”“ , page 55
7 - Bolt
8 - Windshield Wiper Frame
❑ With Windshield Wiper Motor - V-
❑ With Wiper Motor Control Module - J400-
⇒ “1.6 Windshield Wiper Motor V , Removing and Installing”, page 59 .
9 - Bolt
10 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
11 - Cap
12 - Front Passenger Side Windshield Wiper Arm
❑ Different lengths. Refer to the Parts Catalog.
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “1.4 Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and Installing”, page 57 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to ⇒ “1.5 Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting”, page 58 .
54 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

Tightening Specifications and Sequence for the Windshield Wiper

Motor - V-
– Tighten the bolts in steps according to the sequence shown:
Step Bolts Tightening Specification
1. -1 to 3- Install by hand until it stops
2. -1 to 3- 8 Nm
1.1.2 Overview - Windshield Wiper Motor and Windshield Wiper Frame
1 - Windshield Wiper Motor - V-

ling. Refer to
Motor, Replacing”, page
60 .
2 - Bolts
❑ 9 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
3 - Windshield Wiper Frame
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.6 Windshield Wip‐
er Motor V , Removing
and Installing”,
page 59 .
4 - Nut
❑ 25 Nm

1.2 Wiper, Moving Into Service Position
Caution
Risk of damaging the hood by putting the wipers back in basic

setting.
♦ Do not drive a vehicle with windshield wiper arms folded
up.
♦ The windshield wipers automatically go back into their rest
position when the wiper switch is activated or when driving
faster than 6 km/h (4 mph).
Caution
Danger of windshield wiper blade damage due to freezing.

♦ If frost is present, check to see if the windshield wiper
blades are frozen.
If the Windshield Wiper Motor - V- is to be run during the work

procedure, the hood must be completely closed, otherwise the
voltage supply of the Windshield Wiper Motor - V- will be inter‐
rupted.
– Quickly turn on the ignition and then turn it off again.
– Turn the windshield wiper lever in the “one-touch wiping posi‐
tion” within 10 seconds.
• The windshield wipers run in “service position”.
1.3 Wiper Blade, Removing and Installing

Removing
– Bring the windshield wiper into service position. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Wiper, Moving Into Service Position”, page 56 .
Caution
Risk of damaging the wiper blade.

♦ Joint-free windshield wipers are very flexible. Only grasp
the wiper blades in the area for the wiper blade mount to
lift them away from the windshield.
– Lift the windshield wiper arm off the windshield.

– Press the clip in direction of -arrow A- and remove the wiper

blade -1- from the windshield wiper arm -2- in direction of
-arrow B-.
– Remove the wiper blade -1-.
Installing
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the body.

♦ The driver and passenger side wiper blades are different
lengths.

the following:
– Guide the wiper blade -1- parallel into the windshield wiper arm
-2- in direction of -arrow-. Make sure to slide the wiper blade
-1- on until the retaining clips audibly lock in the wiper arm
-2-.
To leave the “service position:”
– Operate the windshield wiper switch.
Or
– Drive the vehicle faster than 6 km/h (4 mph).
1.4 Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and

Installing
♦ Puller - Wiper Arm Kit - T10369-
♦ Puller - Wiper Arm Kit - Puller 1 - T10369/1-
Removing
Caution
Risk of damaging the wiper arm shaft.

♦ The wiper arm shaft can get damaged when removing the
windshield wiper arms without using the -T10369/1- .

procedure, the hood must be closed, otherwise the voltage supply
of the Windshield Wiper Motor - V- will be interrupted.
– Bring the windshield wiper into service position. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Wiper, Moving Into Service Position”, page 56 .

– Pry the caps -3- off of the windshield wiper arms -1- with a
screwdriver.
– Loosen the nuts -2- several turns.
– Position the -T10369/1- on the wiper arm -1- as illustrated.
– Position the thrust piece -2- on the wiper arm shaft.
– Rotate the bolt -3- clockwise until the wiper arm -1- is removed
from the wiper arm shaft.
– Remove the nut completely and remove the windshield wiper

arm -1-.
Installing
the following:
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the body.

♦ The driver and front passenger side wiper arms are dif‐
ferent lengths.
– Adjust the windshield wiper arms. Refer to

⇒ “1.5 Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting”, page 58 .
1.5 Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting

procedure, the hood must be closed, otherwise the voltage supply
of the Windshield Wiper Motor - V- will be interrupted.
Procedure
– Deactivate the APP function. Refer to
⇒ “1.8 Windshield Wiper Motor, Deactivating Alternating Park
Position Function”, page 61 .
– Remove the windshield wiper arms. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and Installing”, page
57 .
– Activate “one-tap wiping” and let the Windshield Wiper Motor
- V- run into its end position.
– Turn off the ignition.
– Position the wiper arm with wiper blade installed at the wiper
arm shaft.

– Align the wiper blade as follows on the windshield.

The dimensions give the distance of the wiper blade tips to the
plenum chamber cover on the lower edge of the windshield.
♦ Dimension -a- + 10 mm ± 5 mm.
♦ Dimension -b- + 10 mm ± 5 mm.
– Tighten the nuts -2- on the windshield wiper arms -1-.
– Activate “one-touch wiping” and let the windshield wiper arms
run into their end position.
– Check the wiper arm adjustment again and if necessary ad‐
just.
– Press the caps -3- onto the wiper arms.

♦ Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Overview - Windshield Wiper System”, page 53
1.6 Windshield Wiper Motor - V- , Removing

and Installing
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 - VAG1410-
Removing
– Remove the windshield wiper arms. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and Installing”, page
57 .
– Remove the left plenum chamber cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Ex‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 50 ; Bulkhead; Plenum Chamber Cover,
Removing and Installing .
– Remove the bolts -1, 3 and 4-.

– When necessary disconnect the damping regulation connec‐

tor.
– Remove the wiper frame -2- with linkage and the Windshield
Wiper Motor - V- from the plenum chamber.
Installing
the following:
– Adjust the windshield wiper arms. Refer to
⇒ “1.5 Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting”, page 58 .
♦ Refer to
⇒ Fig. ““Tightening Specifications and Sequence for the Wind‐
shield Wiper Motor -V- ”“ , page 55
1.7 Windshield Wiper Motor, Replacing

♦ Pry Lever - 80-200-
WARNING
Risk of injury.
♦ When operating an uncovered windshield wiper system
there is a risk of pinching.
♦ The windshield wiper system can only be operated when
installed.
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the hood and the windshield wiper

arm.
♦ By operating the windshield wiper system with the hood
open, pay attention that the is enough clearance to moving
components.
So that the windshield wiper system can be operated with the front
lid open, the latch must be engaged in the »closed« position.
Removing
– Deactivate the wiper motor alternating park position. Refer to
⇒ “1.8 Windshield Wiper Motor, Deactivating Alternating Park
Position Function”, page 61 .
– Remove the windshield wiper frame. Refer to
page 59 .

– Pry the operating rod -4- on the ball joint from the motor crank
-2- using the -80-200- .
– Remove the motor crank -2- from the windshield wiper motor
shaft.
– Remove the bolts -3-.
– Remove the Windshield Wiper Motor - V- from the windshield
wiper frame.
Installing
the following:
– Connect the connector to the Windshield Wiper Motor - V- .
– Activate “one-tap wiping” and let the Windshield Wiper Motor
- V- run into its end position.
– Install the Windshield Wiper Motor - V- on the windshield wiper
frame.
– Install the bolts -3-.

– Install the motor crank -2- on the windshield wiper motor shaft.
– Align the operating rod -4- parallel on the motor crank -2-.
– Tighten the nut -1-.
– Connect the operating rod -4- and motor crank -2- on the ball
joint.
– Install the windshield wiper frame. Refer to
page 59 .
♦ Refer to
⇒ “1.1.2 Overview - Windshield Wiper Motor and Windshield
Wiper Frame”, page 55
1.8 Windshield Wiper Motor, Deactivating

Alternating Park Position Function
Windshield wiper system is equipped with APP function (alter‐
nating park position).
The APP function causes the wiper at every second wiper shut
off to move upward slightly after reaching the lowest position.
To install the motor crank on the Windshield Wiper Motor - V- , it
is necessary to shut off the Windshield Wiper Motor - V- in the
lowest park position. APP function must be deactivated to ensure
this.
An activation of APP function is not possible.
APP function is automatically activated after 100 wiping cycles.
This applies to Windshield Wiper Motor - V- in which the APP

function was deactivated as well as new Windshield Wiper Motor

- V- .
– Deactivate the wiper motor alternating park position using the
Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .
After successfully completing coding/deactivating of the APP
function, Windshield Wiper Motor - V- is located in the lower park
position after the next wiper cycle.
1.9 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Remov‐

ing and Installing
⇒ “1.9.1 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Removing and Installing,
Vehicles with Front Camera for Assistance Systems”, page 62
⇒ “1.9.2 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Removing and Installing,
Vehicles without Front Camera for Assistance Systems”,
page 64
1.9.1 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Remov‐

ing and Installing, Vehicles with Front
Camera for Assistance Systems
The Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- has a silicone layer
as a contact surface to the windshield.
The Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- is designed so that it
can be used again. The only requirement to use it again is that
the connecting pad must not be damaged or dirty.
If a Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- is replaced with a
Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- with a different part num‐
ber, the new Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- must be
adapted using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .
Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- cannot be optionally in‐
stalled. For the correct Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- .
Refer to the Parts Catalog.
Removing
– Remove the cover -1- in the direction of the arrow -A-.
After loosening the wire retainer wait at least one minute. So that
the silicone layer can release the tension and is not damaged
while removing.

– Release the left and right wire retainer -arrows-.

– Pry the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -1- starting at
the top carefully from the frame on the windshield.
– Release the connection -1- and remove and remove the Rain/
Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -2-.
Caution
Lay the removed Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- until

it is reinstalled so that the connecting pad is not contaminated
with dust or other deposits.
Installing
the following:
Caution
♦ Always clean the windshield surface inside the Rain/Light

Recognition Sensor - G397- frame before installing. Re‐
move any traces of the connecting pad still remaining on
the windshield.
♦ Surface (connecting pads) of Rain/Light Recognition Sen‐
sor - G397- must not be contaminated or damaged when
installing. Always replace a sensor that has a damaged
connecting pad. Refer to
⇒ “1.10 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servicing”,
page 66 .
If the connecting pads surface of the Rain/Light Recognition Sen‐

sor - G397- is soiled, it can be potentially cleaned by “applying”
and then “pulling off” one or more adhesive strips.
– Always clean the windshield inside the retaining plate.
– If necessity remove the protective cap -1- on the new Rain/

Light Recognition Sensor - G397- .
– Push the handle in the direction of -arrow A-.
– Remove the protective cap -1- in the direction of -arrow B-.
– Connect connector.

– Install the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -1- in the

frame on the windshield.
– Engage the wire retainer audibly on both sides -arrow-.
Even if the sensor is installed correctly, small air bubbles can form
between the windshield and the connecting pad. The contact sur‐
face must be free-of-bubbles after approximately 10 minutes. If
the contact surface is not free of bubbles after 10 minutes, the
Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- must be removed and in‐
stalled again. Air bubbles between the windshield and the con‐
necting pad cause Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397-
malfunctions.
– If the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- was replaced it
must be adapted using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .
1.9.2 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Remov‐

ing and Installing, Vehicles without Front
Camera for Assistance Systems
The Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- has a silicone layer
as a contact surface to the windshield.
The Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- is designed so that it
can be used again. The only requirement to use it again is that
the connecting pad must not be damaged or dirty.
If a Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- is replaced with a
Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- with a different part num‐
ber, the new Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- must be
adapted using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .
Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- cannot be optionally in‐
stalled. For the correct Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- .
Refer to the Parts Catalog.
Removing
– Remove the interior rearview mirror. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 68 ; Rearview Mirror; Rearview Mirror, Removing
and Installing .
After loosening the wire retainer wait at least one minute. So that
the silicone layer can release the tension and is not damaged
while removing.
– Release the left and right wire retainer -arrows-.
– Pry the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -1- starting at
the top carefully from the frame on the windshield.

– Release the connection -1- and remove and remove the Rain/
Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -2-.
Caution
Lay the removed Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- until

it is reinstalled so that the connecting pad is not contaminated
with dust or other deposits.
Installing
the following:
Caution
♦ Always clean the windshield surface inside the Rain/Light

Recognition Sensor - G397- frame before installing. Re‐
move any traces of the connecting pad still remaining on
the windshield.
♦ Surface (connecting pads) of Rain/Light Recognition Sen‐
sor - G397- must not be contaminated or damaged when
installing. Always replace a sensor that has a damaged
connecting pad. Refer to
⇒ “1.10 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servicing”,
page 66 .
If the connecting pads surface of the Rain/Light Recognition Sen‐

sor - G397- is soiled, it can be potentially cleaned by “applying”
and then “pulling off” one or more adhesive strips.
– Always clean the windshield inside the retaining plate.
– If necessity remove the protective cap -1- on the new Rain/
Light Recognition Sensor - G397- .
– Push the handle in the direction of -arrow A-.
– Remove the protective cap -1- in the direction of -arrow B-.

– Connect connector.
– Install the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -1- in the
frame on the windshield.
– Engage the wire retainer audibly on both sides -arrow-.
Even if the sensor is installed correctly, small air bubbles can form
between the windshield and the connecting pad. The contact sur‐
face must be free-of-bubbles after approximately 10 minutes. If
the contact surface is not free of bubbles after 10 minutes, the
Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- must be removed and in‐
stalled again. Air bubbles between the windshield and the con‐
necting pad cause Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397-
malfunctions.

– If the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- was replaced it

must be adapted using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .
1.10 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servic‐

ing
⇒ “1.10.1 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servicing, TRW”, page
66
⇒ “1.10.2 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servicing, Valeo”, page
67
1.10.1 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servic‐

ing, TRW
There are different housings for the Rain/Light Recognition Sen‐
sor - G397- from different manufacturers.
The sensor housing and optical unit are always delivered as a
replacement part in individual parts with retaining clamps. Re‐
move these clamps if they are not needed.
Procedure
– Remove the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- . Refer to
⇒ “1.9 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 62 .
Caution
The sensor electronics may be damaged.

♦ Be careful not to insert the screwdriver all the way through
the housing up to the sensor electronics.
♦ Do not touch the sensor electronics.
– Loosen the clip -1- on the four retaining tabs -arrows- with a
suitable screwdriver and remove.

– Release the tab -arrows- on both sides and separate the hous‐
ing upper section -1- with optical unit from the housing lower
section -2-.
Caution
The sensor electronics may be damaged.

♦ Do not touch the optical unit.
– Remove the sensor electronics -2- from the upper section

-1- install the new electronics the exact same way.
– Assemble the new housing upper section with optical unit and
protective cover with the housing lower section.
– Install the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- . Refer to
ling”, page 62 .
1.10.2 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servic‐

ing, Valeo
– Remove the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- . Refer to
ling”, page 62 .
– Carefully remove the sensor film -2- or remaining sensor film
carefully from the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -1-.
Caution
The Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- surface must be

completely free of any remaining film.
– Clean the sensor surface with cleaning solution D 009 401 04.
– Remove the silicone paper -3- from the sensor film -2-.
The see-through protective film -1- serves as an assembly aid and
remains on the sensor film.

– Place the sensor film -2- using the clear protective film -1- on
the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -3-.
– Press the sensor film through the protective film -1- free of
bubbles on the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -2-.
– Remove the clear protective film -1- from the sensor film -2-.
– Install the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- . Refer to
ling”, page 62 .

2 Windshield Washer System

⇒ “2.1 Overview - Windshield Washer System”, page 69
⇒ “2.2 Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Installing”,
page 72
⇒ “2.3 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 73
⇒ “2.4 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing and Installing”, page
74
⇒ “2.5 Spray Nozzles, Removing and Installing”, page 74
⇒ “2.6 Spray Nozzles, Adjusting”, page 75
2.1 Overview - Windshield Washer System

⇒ “2.1.1 Overview - Windshield Washer System, with Headlamp
Washer System”, page 69
⇒ “2.1.2 Overview - Windshield Washer System, without Head‐
lamp Washer System”, page 71
2.1.1 Overview - Windshield Washer System, with Headlamp Washer System
1 - Right Spray Nozzle

❑ Vehicle equipment ver‐
sion with Right Washer
Nozzle Heater - Z21-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.5 Spray Nozzles,
ling”, page 74 .
Adjusting”, page 75 .
2 - Left Spray Nozzle
sion with Left Washer
ling. Refer to
ling”, page 74 .
3 - Grommet
❑ For the windshield
washer fluid hose inside
the hood
4 - Washer Fluid Hose
washer system
❑ Black color identification
2. Windshield Washer System 69

5 - Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump - V59-

⇒ “2.4 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing and Installing”, page 74 .
6 - Grommet
❑ Replace if damaged.
7 - Nut
❑ 8 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
8 - Washer Fluid Reservoir
❑ For vehicles with a headlamp washer system
❑ With Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor - G33- Cannot be replaced separately if faulty.
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “2.2 Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Installing”, page 72 .
9 - Filler Tube
Caution
Risk of leaks!
Cannot be separated
from the washer fluid
reservoir.
❑ For the washer fluid reservoir

10 - Filler Tube
Caution
Risk of leaks!
Cannot be separated
from the filler tube.

11 - Screen
12 - Cap
❑ For the filler neck

2.1.2 Overview - Windshield Washer System, without Headlamp Washer System

sion with Right Washer
ling. Refer to
ling”, page 74 .
sion with Left Washer
ling. Refer to
ling”, page 74 .
3 - Grommet
washer fluid hose inside
the hood
washer system
❑ Black color identification
5 - Windshield and Rear Win‐
dow Washer Pump - V59-
ling. Refer to ⇒ “2.4 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing and Installing”, page 74 .
6 - Grommet
7 - Nut
❑ 8 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
❑ For vehicles without a headlamp washer system
9 - Filler Tube
Caution
Risk of leaks!
Cannot be separated
from the washer fluid
reservoir.

10 - Filler Tube
Caution
Risk of leaks!
Cannot be separated
from the filler tube.

11 - Seal
12 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor - G33-
⇒ “2.3 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 73 .
13 - Screen
14 - Cap
❑ For the filler neck
2.2 Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and

Installing
♦ Drip Tray
The removal and installation of the washer fluid reservoir with
headlamp washer system is described. Removing and installing
a washer fluid reservoir without a headlamp washer system is
identical.
Removing
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63 ; Front Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing .
– Remove the left headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 101 .
– Place a drip tray under the washer fluid reservoir.
– If necessity remove the Headlamp Washer Pump - V11- . Re‐
fer to
⇒ “5.3 Headlamp Washer Pump V11 , Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 86 .

– Retainer the retaining tabs -3-.
Caution
There is a danger of leaks.

♦ The windshield washer fluid reservoir is one part. Sepa‐
rating between the washer fluid reservoir, filler tube and
filler neck is not possible. If the components are separated
nevertheless the connection can leak.
– Remove the filler neck -1- upward from the lock carrier -2-
bracket.
– Release and disconnect the connectors -2 and 3-.

– Release the clips -6- in the direction of the arrow -A-.
– Remove the washer fluid hoses -4 and 5- from the Windshield
and Rear Window Washer Pump - V59- .
– Loosen the wiring harness from the washer fluid reservoir
-1-.
– Remove the nuts -1, 2 and 3-.

– Remove the washer fluid reservoir -4- from the threaded pins.
Installing
the following:
In order to prevent interchanging washer fluid line connections at
Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump - V59- , connections
at pump and hose lines are marked with colors. Hose connector
pieces must be connected to the corresponding colored pump
connections during installation.
♦ Refer to
⇒ “2.1 Overview - Windshield Washer System”, page 69
2.3 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor,

♦ Drip Tray
The Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor - G33- can depending
on version be replaced individually or only with the entire con‐
tainer.
Removing

– Remove the left front wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body

Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner; Front Wheel
Housing Liner, Removing and Installing .
– Remove the Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor - G33-
-1- from the washer fluid reservoir.
– When necessary remove the seal -3- from the washer fluid
reservoir.
Installing
the following:
– Install the seal correctly in the opening in the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.
– Coat the seal with washer fluid, so that the Windshield Washer
Fluid Level Sensor - G33- can be easily pushed in.
2.4 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing

and Installing
♦ Drip Tray
Removing
– Remove the left front wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner; Front Wheel
Housing Liner, Removing and Installing .
The wiring harness -2- remains in the washer fluid reservoir.
– Release the clamps -3 and 4- in the direction of -arrow A-.
– Remove the washer fluid hose from the Windshield and Rear
Window Washer Pump - V59- -5-.
– Remove the Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump -
V59- -5- upward in the direction of -arrow B- from the washer
fluid reservoir.
Installing
the following:
In order to prevent interchanging washer fluid line connections at
Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump - V59- , connections
at pump and hose lines are marked with colors. Hose connector
pieces must be connected to the corresponding colored pump
connections during installation.
– Check the sealing grommet for damage.
2.5 Spray Nozzles, Removing and Installing


Removing
– Open the hood.
– Push the spray nozzle upward -arrow A- and tilt it out from
under the flap -arrow B-.
– Release the hose clip -1- in the direction of -arrow- and remove
the hose connection -2- from the spray nozzle -4-.
– Disconnect the connector -3- and remove the spray nozzle

-4-.
Installing
the following:
When connecting the washer fluid line, ensure that the securing
clip engages audibly into the connection.
– Starting at the top, slide the spray nozzle into the installation
opening until it engages audibly.
– Adjust the spray nozzles. Refer to
⇒ “2.6 Spray Nozzles, Adjusting”, page 75 .
2.6 Spray Nozzles, Adjusting
Caution
Risk of damage.
♦ Do not use any objects to clean the spray nozzles!
Remove the spray nozzles if the spraying field is uneven due to

dirt in the nozzle, and flush out in the opposite direction of the
spray. It is permissible to further blow through in opposite direc‐
tion of spray with compressed air. Do not use any objects to clean
the spray nozzles!
– Adjusting washer nozzles for front windshield washer system.
Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 ; Procedure Descrip‐
tions .

3 Rear Window Wiper System

⇒ “3.1 Overview - Rear Window Wiper System”, page 76
⇒ “3.2 Wiper Blade, Removing and Installing”, page 77
⇒ “3.3 Windshield Wiper Arm, Removing and Installing”,
page 77
⇒ “3.4 Wiper Arm, Adjusting”, page 78
⇒ “3.5 Rear Window Wiper Motor V12 , Removing and Installing”,
page 78
3.1 Overview - Rear Window Wiper System
1 - Cap
2 - Nut
❑ 12 Nm
3 - Wiper Arm with Joint-Free
Windshield Wiper
ling. Refer to
Arm, Removing and In‐
❑ Park position, adjusting.
Refer to
⇒ “3.4 Wiper Arm, Ad‐
justing”, page 78 .
❑ Joint-free windshield
wiper, removing and in‐
stalling. Refer to
page 77 .
4 - Seal
❑ Inside the rear window
Refer to
⇒ “3.5 Rear Window
Wiper Motor V12 , Re‐
page 78 .
ling. Refer to
Wiper Motor V12 , Re‐
page 78 .
5 - Rear Window Wiper Motor
- V12-
⇒ “3.5 Rear Window Wiper Motor V12 , Removing and Installing”, page 78 .
6 - Nut
❑ 8 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
7 - Rubber Ring
❑ Quantity: 3

8 - Spacer
❑ Quantity: 3
3.2 Wiper Blade, Removing and Installing
Caution
Risk of damaging the wiper blade.

♦ Joint-free windshield wipers are very flexible. Only take
hold of the wiper blades in the wiper blade mounting area
in order to lift them away from the rear window.
Removing
– Remove the wiper arm from the rear window.
– Pivot the wiper blade in the direction of -arrow A- from the
windshield wiper arm.
– Push the release button -2-.
– Remove the wiper blade on the wiper blade mount -1- in the
direction of - arrow B- from the windshield wiper arm.
Installing
the following:
The wiper blade must audibly engage in the wiper arm.
3.3 Windshield Wiper Arm, Removing and

Installing
Removing
– Activate “rear wiper” and let the wiper arm run to end position.
– Switch off the ignition and remove the ignition key, if equipped.
– Push together the rear window wiper cap -1- in the direction
of -arrow A-.
– Fold the cap in the direction of -arrow B- and unclip.
– Loosen the nut but do not remove it.
– Install the -T10369/5- on the windshield wiper arm -2-.
– Position the thrust piece -3- on the wiper arm shaft.
– Rotate the bolt -1- clockwise until the wiper arm is removed
from the wiper arm shaft.
3. Rear Window Wiper System 77

– Completely remove the nut -4- and remove the windshield

wiper arm.
Installing
the following:
– Adjust the wiper arm. Refer to
⇒ “3.4 Wiper Arm, Adjusting”, page 78 .
3.4 Wiper Arm, Adjusting

Procedure
– Remove the wiper arm. Refer to
⇒ “3.3 Windshield Wiper Arm, Removing and Installing”, page
77 .
– Activate “rear wipe” and let wiper arm shaft run to end position.
– Position the wiper arm with wiper blade installed at the wiper
arm shaft.
– Align the wiper blade on the rear window as follows.
The dimension is the gap between tip of wiper blade and lower
edge of window.
♦ Dimension -a- = 33 + 5 mm.
– Tighten the wiper arm nut.
– Activate “rear wiper” and let the wiper arm run to end position.
– Check the wiper arm adjustment again and correct if neces‐
sary.
♦ Refer to
3.5 Rear Window Wiper Motor - V12- , Re‐

moving and Installing
Removing
– Remove the wiper arm. Refer to
⇒ “3.3 Windshield Wiper Arm, Removing and Installing”, page
77 .

– Remove the lower rear lid trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70 ; Luggage Compartment Trim Panels; Rear Lid
Lower Trim Panel, Removing and Installing .
– Remove the nuts -2, 3, and 5-.
– Remove the Rear Window Wiper Motor - V12- -4-.
Installing
the following:
– Coat the inside of the seal in the rear window with a rubber-
and plastic-compatible lubricant (polyethylene glycol).
– Make sure the seal fits correctly in the rear window opening.
Marking -1- of seal must align with marking -2- on rear window.
– Adjust the wiper arm. Refer to
⇒ “3.4 Wiper Arm, Adjusting”, page 78 .
♦ Refer to
3. Rear Window Wiper System 79

4 Rear Window Washer System

⇒ “4.1 Overview - Rear Window Washer System”, page 80
page 82
⇒ “4.3 Rear Window Washer Pump, Removing and Installing”,
page 82
⇒ “4.4 Spray Nozzle, Removing and Installing”, page 83
⇒ “4.5 Spray Nozzle, Adjusting”, page 84
4.1 Overview - Rear Window Washer Sys‐

tem
⇒ “4.1.1 Overview - Rear Window Washer System, Sedan, Ex‐
cept GTI”, page 80
⇒ “4.1.2 Overview - Rear Window Washer System, Sedan, GTI”,
page 81
⇒ “4.1.3 Overview - Rear Window Washer System, Wagon”, page
82
4.1.1 Overview - Rear Window Washer System, Sedan, Except GTI
1 - High-Mounted Brake Lamp

2 - Washer Hose Connection
❑ For the rear window
washer system
3 - Spray Nozzle
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.4.1 Spray Nozzle,
ling, Except GTI”,
page 83 .
⇒ “4.5 Spray Nozzle,
❑ In the right side panel to
the rear window washer
system spray nozzle
❑ In the engine compart‐
ment to the rear window
washer system spray
nozzle
ling. Refer to
Washer Pump, Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page
82 .
❑ With grommet, replace if
damaged.


4.1.2 Overview - Rear Window Washer System, Sedan, GTI

Connection
washer system
system spray nozzle
washer system spray
nozzle
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.2 Washer Fluid
Reservoir, Removing
and Installing”,
page 82 .
ling. Refer to
82 .
damaged.
7 - Roof Edge Spoiler
9 - Spray Nozzle
⇒ “4.4.2 Spray Nozzle, Removing and Installing, Only GTI”, page 83 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to ⇒ “4.5 Spray Nozzle, Adjusting”, page 84 .
4. Rear Window Washer System 81

4.1.3 Overview - Rear Window Washer System, Wagon

washer system
3 - Spray Nozzle
ling. Refer to
ling”, page 83 .
system spray nozzle
washer system spray
nozzle
ling. Refer to
82 .
damaged.
ling. Refer to ⇒ “4.2 Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Installing”, page 82 .

Installing
The combined washer fluid reservoir for the front and back wind‐
shield washer systems is located in the front left wheel housing.
– Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and installing. Refer to
page 72 .
4.3 Rear Window Washer Pump, Removing

and Installing
The washer pump for the windshield and the rear window washer
system is located inside the windshield washer fluid reservoir in
the left front wheel housing.
– Removing and installing the Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump - V59- . Refer to

⇒ “2.4 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing and Installing”,

page 74 .
4.4 Spray Nozzle, Removing and Installing

⇒ “4.4.1 Spray Nozzle, Removing and Installing, Except GTI”,
page 83
⇒ “4.4.2 Spray Nozzle, Removing and Installing, Only GTI”, page
83
4.4.1 Spray Nozzle, Removing and Installing,

Except GTI
The spray nozzle is installed in the high-mounted brake lamp.
Removing
– Remove the high-mounted brake lamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.2 High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Removing and Installing”,
page 158 .
– Release both catches in direction of -arrows-.
– Remove the spray nozzle -1- toward the rear from the high-
mounted brake lamp.
Installing
the following:
– Adjust the rear window washer system spray nozzles. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 ; Procedure Descriptions .
4.4.2 Spray Nozzle, Removing and Installing,

Only GTI
The spray nozzle is installed in the high-mounted brake lamp.
Removing
– Remove the high-mounted brake lamp. Refer to
page 158 .
– Remove the spray nozzle -1- with the hose -2- in the direction
of -arrow A- from the high-mounted brake lamp.
Installing
the following:
Pay attention that the spray nozzle is pushed in the mount until it
stop.
4. Rear Window Washer System 83

4.5 Spray Nozzle, Adjusting

The spray nozzle on a GTI cannot be adjusted.
– Adjust the rear window washer system spray nozzles. Refer

5 Headlamp Washer System

⇒ “5.1 Overview - Headlamp Washer System”, page 85
page 85
⇒ “5.3 Headlamp Washer Pump V11 , Removing and Installing”,
page 86
⇒ “5.4 Spray Nozzles, Removing and Installing”, page 86
⇒ “5.5 Spray Nozzles, Adjusting”, page 87
⇒ “5.6 Lift Cylinder, Removing and Installing”, page 87
5.1 Overview - Headlamp Washer System
1 - Headlamp Washer Pump -

V11-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.3 Headlamp
Washer Pump V11 , Re‐
page 86 .
2 - Grommet
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.2 Washer Fluid
Reservoir, Removing
and Installing”,
page 85 .
4 - Nut
❑ 8 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
ling. Refer to
ling”, page 86 .
ling. Refer to
ling”, page 86 .

Installing
The combined washer fluid reservoir for the windshield and rear
window washer systems, as well as the headlamp washer sys‐
tem, is located in the left front wheel housing.
5. Headlamp Washer System 85

– Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and installing. Refer to

page 72 .
5.3 Headlamp Washer Pump - V11- , Re‐

♦ Drip Tray
Removing
– Push the release button -3-.
– Remove the washer fluid hose -4- from the Headlamp Washer
Pump - V11- -1-.
– Remove the Headlamp Washer Pump - V11- -1- in the direc‐
tion of the -arrow A- upward out of the washer fluid reservoir.
Installing
the following:
– Check the sealing grommet for damage.
5.4 Spray Nozzles, Removing and Installing

Removing
– Remove the lift cylinder. Refer to
⇒ “5.6 Lift Cylinder, Removing and Installing”, page 87 .
– Push the catch in the direction of -arrow A-.
– Remove the spray nozzle -1- from the lift cylinder -2-.
Installing
the following:
The spray nozzle must engage audibly when pushed in the lift
cylinder.

5.5 Spray Nozzles, Adjusting

The nozzles are already adjusted by the manufacturer and must
not be adjusted after installation.
– Check the adjustment of the spray nozzle. Refer to ⇒ Mainte‐
nance ; Booklet 36.1 ; Procedure Descriptions .
5.6 Lift Cylinder, Removing and Installing

♦ Drip Tray
Removing
– Remove the front wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body Exte‐
rior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner; Front Wheel Housing
Liner, Removing and Installing .
– Place a drip tray under the lift cylinder.
– Push the release button -1- in the direction of the -arrow A-.
– Remove the washer fluid hose -2- in the direction of the arrow
-B- from the lift cylinder -3-.
Note
A second technician is required for removing the cap.
– Move the lift cylinder with the cap -1- out of the bumper cover
using pressurized air and hold.
– Push the cap -1- on both sides out of the upper mounting -2-
in the direction of the -arrow A-.
– Pivot the cap -1- in the direction of the -arrow B- and unclip
from the lower mounting -3-.
– Push the release buttons -1- in the direction of the -arrow A-.
5. Headlamp Washer System 87

– Remove the lift cylinder -2- downward from the bracket -3-.
Installing
the following:
Pay attention to the markings on the lift cylinder for the left and
right.
The lift cylinder must engage audibly when pushing in the mount.

6 Washer Fluid Hoses

⇒ “6.1 Washer Fluid Hoses, Servicing”, page 89
6.1 Washer Fluid Hoses, Servicing

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 92 ; Washer Fluid
Hoses .
6. Washer Fluid Hoses 89

7 Special Tools
♦ Pry Lever - 80-200-

94 – Exterior Lights, Switches
1. Headlamp 91
1 Headlamp
⇒ “1.1 Overview - Headlamp”, page 92
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 101
⇒ “1.3 Headlamp, Adjusting”, page 105
⇒ “1.4 Headlamp Installation Position, Correcting”, page 105
⇒ “1.5 Left/Right Front Turn Signal Bulb M5 / M7 , Removing and
⇒ “1.6 Headlamp Housing Repair Kit, Installing”, page 109
⇒ “1.7 Headlamp, Changing from LHD to RHD”, page 110
⇒ “1.8 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 ,
Removing and Installing”, page 111
⇒ “1.9 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing and Installing”, page
113
⇒ “1.10 Left/Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb M30 / M32 , Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 114
⇒ “1.11 Left/Right HID Headlamp Bulb L13 / L14 , Removing and
⇒ “1.12 Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb M1 / M3 , Removing and
⇒ “1.13 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb L174 / L175 , Re‐
⇒ “1.14 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp
LED Module L176 / L177 , Removing and Installing”, page 119
⇒ “1.15 Left/Right Low Beam Headlamp Reflector Motor V294 /
V295 , Removing and Installing”, page 119
⇒ “1.16 Left/Right Cornering Lamp Bulb L148 / L149 , Removing
and Installing”, page 119
⇒ “1.17 Left/Right HID Headlamp Control Module J343 / J344 ,
⇒ “1.18 Left/Right Headlamp Power Output Stage J667 / J668 ,
⇒ “1.19 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp
Control Module J860 / J861 , Removing and Installing”,
page 122
⇒ “1.20 Sensor for Left/Right Variable Headlamp Positioning Mo‐
tor G695 / G696 , Removing and Installing”, page 123
⇒ “1.21 Left/Right Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor V446 /
V447 , Removing and Installing”, page 123
⇒ “1.22 Left/Right Swivel Module Position Sensor G474 / G475 ,
⇒ “1.23 Left/Right Adaptive Cornering Lamp Motor V318 / V319 ,
1.1 Overview - Headlamp

⇒ “1.1.1 Overview - Halogen Dual Headlamp”, page 93
⇒ “1.1.2 Overview - HID Headlamp”, page 95
⇒ “1.1.3 Overview - HID Headlamp for Cornering Lamp and LED
Daytime Running Lamp”, page 97
⇒ “1.1.4 Overview - HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam
Control and LED-Daytime Running Lamps”, page 99
92 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

⇒ “1.1.5 Overview - Headlamp Housing Repair Set”, page 101
1.1.1 Overview - Halogen Dual Headlamp
1 - Bulb for Position Lamp/Day‐

time Running Lamp/High
Beam Headlamp
❑ The lamp has three
functions:
❑ Left Position Lamp Bulb
- M1- / Right Position
Lamp Bulb - M3-
❑ Left Daytime Running
Lamp Bulb - L174- /
Right Daytime Running
Lamp Bulb - L175-
❑ Left High Beam Head‐
lamp Bulb - M30- / Right
High Beam Headlamp
Bulb - M32-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.10 Left/Right High
Beam Headlamp Bulb
M30 / M32 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 114 .
2 - Socket
❑ For bulb for position
lamp/daytime running
lamp/high beam head‐
lamp
3 - Housing Cover
4 - Housing Cover
5 - Headlamp Beam Adjust‐
ment Motor
❑ Left Headlamp Beam
Adjustment Motor - V48-
❑ Right Headlamp Beam
Adjustment Motor - V49-
⇒ “1.8.1 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 , Removing and Installing, Halogen
Dual Headlamps”, page 111 .
6 - Housing Cover
7 - Housing Cover
8 - Bulb Socket
❑ To the low beam headlamp bulb mount
9 - Low Beam Headlamp Bulb
❑ Left Low Beam Headlamp Bulb - M29-
❑ Right Low Beam Headlamp Bulb - M31-
⇒ “1.9 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing and Installing”, page 113 .
10 - Bolt
❑ 8 Nm
❑ For attaching on the upper longitudinal member
Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info 1. Headlamp 93

11 - Adjusting Element
12 - Bolt
❑ 4 Nm
❑ Only loosen
❑ For attaching to the headlamp mount
13 - Balancing Element
14 - Spring Nut
15 - Bolt
❑ 4 Nm
❑ For attaching the bumper guide
16 - Headlamp
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 101 .
17 - Impact Screw
❑ For adjusting the headlamp parallel to the hood edge
18 - Banjo Bolt
❑ For the headlamp height adjustment
19 - Bolt
❑ 4 Nm
❑ For attaching to the lock carrier
20 - Front Turn Signal Bulb
❑ Left Front Turn Signal Bulb - M5-
❑ Right Front Turn Signal Bulb - M7-
⇒ “1.5.1 Left/Right Front Turn Signal Bulb M5 / M7 , Removing and Installing, Halogen Dual Headlamp”,
page 107 .
21 - Socket
❑ For the front turn signal lamp

1.1.2 Overview - HID Headlamp
1 - Headlamp
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Re‐
page 101 .
❑ Left Front Turn Signal
Bulb - M5-
❑ Right Front Turn Signal
Bulb - M7-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.5.2 Left/Right Front
Turn Signal Bulb M5 /
M7 , Removing and In‐
stalling, HID Head‐
lamps”, page 108 .
3 - Cornering Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Cornering Lamp
Bulb - L148-
❑ Right Cornering Lamp
Bulb - L149-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.16 Left/Right Cor‐
nering Lamp Bulb L148 /
L149 , Removing and In‐
4 - Housing Cover
5 - HID Headlamp Bulb
❑ With integrated ignition
coil
❑ Left HID Headlamp Bulb
- L13-
❑ Right HID Headlamp Bulb - L14-
⇒ “1.11 Left/Right HID Headlamp Bulb L13 / L14 , Removing and Installing”, page 115 .
6 - Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor
❑ Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
❑ Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V49-
⇒ “1.8.2 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 , Removing and Installing, HID Head‐
7 - Housing Cover
❑ 2 Nm
❑ With screws
❑ Quantity: 5
8 - Bolt
❑ 4 Nm
❑ With balancing element
1. Headlamp 95
9 - Bolt
❑ 8 Nm
10 - Bolt
❑ 4 Nm
11 - HID Headlamp Control Module
❑ Left HID Headlamp Control Module - J343-
❑ Right HID Headlamp Control Module - J344-
⇒ “1.17 Left/Right HID Headlamp Control Module J343 / J344 , Removing and Installing”, page 120 .
❑ Screws: 2 Nm
12 - Headlamp Range Control Module - J431-
⇒ “11.2 Control Module for Headlamp Range/Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range, Removing and
13 - Level Control System Sensor
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 43 ; Level Control System
Sensor .
14 - Impact Screw
15 - Bolt
❑ 4 Nm
❑ With banjo bolt
16 - Daytime Running Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L174-
❑ Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L175-
⇒ “1.13.2 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb L174 / L175 , Removing and Installing, HID Headlamp”,
page 118 .

1.1.3 Overview - HID Headlamp for Cornering Lamp and LED Daytime Running
Lamp
1 - Headlamp
ling. Refer to
page 101 .
Bulb - M5-
Bulb - M7-
ling. Refer to
Bulb - L148-
Bulb - L149-
ling. Refer to
4 - Housing Cover
coil
- L13-
7 - Housing Cover
❑ 2 Nm
❑ With screws
❑ Quantity: 5
8 - Bolt
❑ 4 Nm
1. Headlamp 97
9 - Bolt
❑ 8 Nm
10 - Bolt
❑ 4 Nm
11 - Headlamp Power Output Stage
❑ Screws: 2 Nm
❑ Left Headlamp Power Output Stage - J667-
❑ Right Headlamp Power Output Stage - J668-
⇒ “1.18 Left/Right Headlamp Power Output Stage J667 / J668 , Removing and Installing”, page 121 .
❑ Screws: 2 Nm
13 - Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module
❑ Screws: 2 Nm
❑ Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module - J860-
❑ Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module - J861-
⇒ “1.19 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module J860 / J861 , Removing
and Installing”, page 122 .
14 - Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range Control Module - J745-
Sensor .
16 - Impact Screw
17 - Bolt
❑ 4 Nm
❑ With banjo bolt

1.1.4 Overview - HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control and LED-Day‐
time Running Lamps
1 - Headlamp
ling. Refer to
page 101 .
Bulb - M5-
Bulb - M7-
ling. Refer to
Bulb - L148-
Bulb - L149-
ling. Refer to
4 - Housing Cover
coil
- L13-
7 - Housing Cover
❑ 2 Nm
❑ With screws
❑ Quantity: 5
8 - Bolt
❑ 4 Nm
1. Headlamp 99
9 - Bolt
❑ 8 Nm
10 - Bolt
❑ 4 Nm
11 - Headlamp Power Output Stage
❑ Screws: 2 Nm
❑ Left Headlamp Power Output Stage - J667-
❑ Right Headlamp Power Output Stage - J668-
⇒ “1.18 Left/Right Headlamp Power Output Stage J667 / J668 , Removing and Installing”, page 121 .
❑ Screws: 2 Nm
13 - Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module
❑ Screws: 2 Nm
❑ Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module - J860-
❑ Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module - J861-
⇒ “1.19 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module J860 / J861 , Removing
14 - Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range Control Module - J745-
Sensor .
16 - Impact Screw
17 - Bolt
❑ 4 Nm
❑ With banjo bolt

1.1.5 Overview - Headlamp Housing Repair Set
1 - Headlamp
2 - Inner Mounting Tab
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.6 Headlamp Hous‐
ing Repair Kit, Instal‐
ling”, page 109 .
3 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 1
4 - Rear Mounting Tab
ling. Refer to
ling”, page 109 .
5 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
6 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 1
7 - Upper Mounting Tab
ling. Refer to
ling”, page 109 .
8 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
9 - Outer Mounting Tab
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “1.6 Headlamp Housing Repair Kit, Installing”, page 109 .
1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing
WARNING
Life-threatening danger due to high voltage.

♦ Pay attention to usage and safety information for HID
headlamps. Refer to
page 2 .
1. Headlamp 101
Note
♦ If only one headlamp was removed, then the front bumper

cover must be loosened only on the respective side.
♦ If both headlamps are removed, then the front bumper must
be completely removed. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.
63 ; Front Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and Installing .
Removing
– Remove the radiator grille. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.
66 ; Radiator Grille/Front Trim; Radiator Grille, Removing and
Installing .
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the components.

♦ Carefully remove the bumper cover. Make sure that the
bumper cover is not deformed or ripped.
♦ When removing the headlamp the surface can be scratch‐
ed. Tape up those components which could be damaged.
– Remove the bolts -3- from the front wheel housing liner.

– Remove the bolts between the bumper cover and lock carrier
from below.
– If equipped, remove the bolts -1-.
– Detach the bumper cover -2- from the fender and remove in
the direction of the -arrow A-.
Note
The front bumper cover requires complete removal only when re‐
moval and installation of both headlamps are performed. Refer to
⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 63 ; Front Bumper; Bumper Cover,
1. Headlamp 103
– Tape off the marked areas -3- on the headlamp -2-.

– Tape off the bottom of the fender brace -4-.
– Tape off the marked area -5- on the bumper cover -1-.
– Remove the bolts -3, 5 and 6-.
– Loosen the bolt -4-.

– Remove the headlamp -1- forward.
Installing
the following:

– Slide the headlamp into the bumper cover guide.

– Uniformly adjust the headlamp gap distribution. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Headlamp Installation Position, Correcting”,
page 105 .
– Push on the bumper cover -1-. Pay attention that it is pushed
in the mounts -2- under the headlamp.
– Perform a function test.
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
♦ Refer to ⇒ “1.1 Overview - Headlamp”, page 92
1.3 Headlamp, Adjusting

⇒ “1.3.1 Halogen Twin Headlamp, Adjusting”, page 105
⇒ “1.3.2 HID Headlamp, Adjusting”, page 105
⇒ “1.3.3 Fog Lamp, Adjusting”, page 105
⇒ “1.3.4 Auxiliary Headlamps, Adjusting”, page 105
1.3.1 Halogen Twin Headlamp, Adjusting

Adjusting the halogen twin headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ;
Booklet 36.1 ; Procedure Descriptions .
1.3.2 HID Headlamp, Adjusting

HID headlamp, adjusting. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 ;
Procedure Descriptions .
1.3.3 Fog Lamp, Adjusting

Adjusting the fog lamps. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 ;
Procedure Descriptions .
1.3.4 Auxiliary Headlamps, Adjusting

Retrofitted auxiliary headlamps must be checked and adjusted
according to the guidelines used for other systems.
1.4 Headlamp Installation Position, Correcting

Procedure
– Loosen the bolts -3 through 6-.
1. Headlamp 105
– Uniformly adjust the gap distribution of the headlamp -1- to the

fender.
– Tighten the bolts -5 and 6-.
– Close the hood.
– Uniformly adjust the gap distribution of the banjo bolt for the
bolt -3- and the impact screw -2-.
– Open the hood.
– Tighten the bolt -3- in the bolt.
– Tighten the bolt -4-.

1.5 Left/Right Front Turn Signal Bulb -M5- /

-M7- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “1.5.1 Left/Right Front Turn Signal Bulb M5 / M7 , Removing
and Installing, Halogen Dual Headlamp”, page 107
⇒ “1.5.2 Left/Right Front Turn Signal Bulb M5 / M7 , Removing
and Installing, HID Headlamps”, page 108
1.5.1 Left/Right Front Turn Signal Bulb -M5- /

-M7- , Removing and Installing, Halogen
Dual Headlamp
Removing
– Remove the housing cover -1- from the headlamp.
– Remove the socket with bulb socket -1- from the reflector -2-
in the direction of the -arrow A-.
1. Headlamp 107
– Remove the Left Front Turn Signal Bulb - M5- -2- from the
socket -1-.
Installing
the following:
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

♦ Do not touch glass cone of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
♦ Use clean cloth gloves to insert the bulbs.
♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing
cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

1.5.2 Left/Right Front Turn Signal Bulb -M5- /

-M7- , Removing and Installing, HID
Headlamps
Removing
If the left turn signal bulb cannot be removed as described, then
the air filter housing must be removed. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 23 ;
Air Filter; Air Filter Housing, Removing and Installing or ⇒ Rep.
Gr. 24 ; Air Filter; Air Filter Housing, Removing and Installing .
Vehicles with TDI Engine
If the right turn signal bulb cannot be removed as described, then
the fuel filter must be loosened. The fuel filter is set aside with the
wires connected. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 20 ; Fuel Filter; Fuel Filter,
All Vehicles
– Turn the housing cover -1- in the direction of -arrow A- and
remove from the headlamp.

– Turn the bulb socket -1- counter-clockwise until stop.

– Remove the bulb socket -1- in the direction of -arrow A- out of
the reflector -2-.
– Release and disconnect the connector -1- on the Left Front

Turn Signal Bulb - M5- with the bulb socket -2-.
Installing
the following:
Caution


1.6 Headlamp Housing Repair Kit, Installing

Headlamp mounting tabs that have broken off can be replaced by
installing the repair set. Completely replacing the headlamp is not
necessary.
There are different repair kits for left and right headlamps. Refer
to Parts Catalog.
Procedure
– Remove the headlamp with the broken tabs. Refer to
– Remove the rest of the broken tab on the headlamp housing.
– Place the mounting tabs -1- from the repair kit on the headlamp
and secure them with the bolts -2-.
1. Headlamp 109
– Install the headlamp and align to the body contour.

1.7 Headlamp, Changing from LHD to RHD

⇒ “1.7.1 Headlamp, Changing from LHD to RHD, Halogen Dual
Headlamp”, page 110
⇒ “1.7.2 Headlamp, Changing from LHD to RHD, Except Halogen
Dual Headlamp”, page 111
1.7.1 Headlamp, Changing from LHD to RHD,

Halogen Dual Headlamp
If the vehicle is driven in countries where the traffic drives on the
other side of the road (either right-hand or left-hand traffic) than
where it is normally driven, no actions whatsoever must be per‐
formed.

1.7.2 Headlamp, Changing from LHD to RHD,

Except Halogen Dual Headlamp
If the vehicle is driven in countries where the traffic drives on the
other side of the road (either right-hand or left-hand traffic) than
where it is normally driven, both headlamps must be adjusted. To
prevent the asymmetrical low beam from blinding.
Converting between left and right hand traffic and vice-versa
takes place via the Infotainment system.
The use of travel mode is only permitted, when it is used only short
period of time. For longer use country-specific headlamps must
be installed.
– Push the button CAR on the Front Information Display Control
Head - J685- .
– Push the functional surface Setup and Lamp .
– Enter the adaptation in the “Lamp Settings” menu.
1.8 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment

Motor - V48- / -V49- , Removing and In‐
stalling
⇒ “1.8.1 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 ,
Removing and Installing, Halogen Dual Headlamps”, page 111
⇒ “1.8.2 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 ,
Removing and Installing, HID Headlamps”, page 112
1.8.1 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment

stalling, Halogen Dual Headlamps
Removing
If the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48- cannot be
removed as described, then the headlamp must be removed. Re‐
fer to ⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 101 .
– Remove the housing cover -1- from the headlamp in the di‐
rection of -arrow A-.
– Release the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
-1-:
♦ Turn the led headlamp left opposite the direction of the
-arrow A-.
♦ Turn the headlamp right in the direction of the -arrow A-.
1. Headlamp 111
– Pull the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48- -1- in

the direction of the -arrow C-.
– Turn the height adjustment -2- in the direction of the
-arrow B- (lower the reflector). While doing so hold the Left
Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48- -1- tensioned.
– Remove the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
-1- from the headlamp height adjustment in the direction of the
-arrow C-.
Installing
the following:
Caution

– Connect the connector when pushing in the Left Headlamp

Beam Adjustment Motor - V48- .
– Pull the reflector rearward and push the Left Headlamp Beam
Adjustment Motor - V48- in the headlamp-height adjustment,
until it engages audibly.
– Secure the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
-1- in the direction of the arrow -A-.
– Turn the height adjustment -2- opposite of the direction of the
arrow -B-. The reflector must be moveable.
1.8.2 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment

stalling, HID Headlamps
Removing
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to

– Remove the housing cover -1- bolts -2-.

– Remove the housing cover -1-.
– Release the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
-1-:
♦ Turn the headlamp left in the direction of the -arrow A-.
♦ Turn the headlamp right opposite the direction of the
-arrow A-.
– Pull the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48- -1- in
the direction of the -arrow C-.
– Turn the height adjustment -2- in the direction of the
-arrow B- (lower the reflector). While doing so hold the Left
Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48- -1- tensioned.
– Remove the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
-1- from the headlamp height adjustment in the direction of the
-arrow C-.

Installing
the following:
Caution

– Connect the connector when pushing in the Left Headlamp

Beam Adjustment Motor - V48- .
– Pull the reflector rearward and push the Left Headlamp Beam
Adjustment Motor - V48- in the headlamp-height adjustment,
until it engages audibly.
– Secure the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
-1- opposite the direction of the -arrow A-.
– Turn the height adjustment -2- opposite of the direction of the
-arrow B-. The reflector must be moveable.
1.9 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing

and Installing
The Left Low Beam Headlamp Bulb - M29- / Right Low Beam
Headlamp Bulb - M31- is only installed with halogen twin head‐
lamps.
Removing
1. Headlamp 113

– Turn the housing cover -1- in the direction of the -arrow A-.
– Turn the bulb socket -1- in the direction of the -arrow A-, until
the retaining tab -3- is in the opening -2-.
– Remove the bulb socket -1- in the direction of the -arrow B-.
– Remove bulb -1- from socket -2-.

Installing
the following:
Caution

– Install new bulb in the bulb socket.

– Install the bulb socket in the reflector do that the retaining tab
points upward and fits in the opening.
1.10 Left/Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb -

M30- / -M32- , Removing and Installing

Removing
– Remove the housing cover -1- in the direction of the
-arrow A-.
– Turn the socket -1- in the direction of the -arrow A-, until the
contacts are turned out of the contact housing -2-.
– Remove the socket -1- in the direction of the -arrow B-.
– Remove the lamp -2- from the socket -1-.

Installing
the following:
Caution


1.11 Left/Right HID Headlamp Bulb - L13- / -

L14- , Removing and Installing
1. Headlamp 115
WARNING
High voltage poses a life-endangering risk, injury risk and en‐

vironmental hazard.
headlamps. Refer to
page 2 .
Removing
– Remove the housing cover -1 bolts 2-.
– Turn the securing tab -1- in the direction of the -arrow A- to

disconnect the connector -2-.

– Turn the locking mechanism -1- in the direction of the

-arrow A-.
– Remove the HID headlamp bulb -2- in the direction of the
-arrow B- from the housing.
Installing
the following:
Caution

Note
Installation position: the electrical connection faces down.

1.12 Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb - M1- / -

M3- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “1.12.1 Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb M1 / M3 , Removing and
Installing, Halogen Dual Headlamp”, page 117
⇒ “1.12.2 Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb M1 / M3 , Removing and
Installing, HID Headlamp”, page 118
1.12.1 Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb - M1- / -

M3- , Removing and Installing, Halogen
Dual Headlamp
The Left Position Lamp Bulb - M1- and the Right Position Lamp
Bulb - M3- is integrated in the Left High Beam Headlamp Bulb -
M30- and in the Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb - M32- .
– Left/Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb -M30- / -M32- , Remov‐
ing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.10 Left/Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb M30 / M32 ,
Removing and Installing”, page 114 .
1. Headlamp 117
1.12.2 Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb - M1- / -

M3- , Removing and Installing, HID
Headlamp
The Left Position Lamp Bulb - M1- and the Right Position Lamp
Bulb - M3- is integrated in the Left Daytime Running Lamp Bulb -
L174- and in the Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L175- .
– Daytime Running Lamp Bulb -L174- / -L175- , Removing and
installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.13.2 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb L174 / L175 ,
Removing and Installing, HID Headlamp”, page 118 .
1.13 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb

- L174- / -L175- , Removing and Instal‐
ling
Removing and Installing, Halogen Dual Headlamp”, page 118
Removing and Installing, HID Headlamp”, page 118
1.13.1 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb

- L174- / -L175- , Removing and Instal‐
ling, Halogen Dual Headlamp
The Left Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L174- and the Right Day‐
time Running Lamp Bulb - L175- is integrated in the Left High
Beam Headlamp Bulb - M30- and in the Right High Beam Head‐
lamp Bulb - M32- .
– Left/Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb -M30- / -M32- , Remov‐
⇒ “1.10 Left/Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb M30 / M32 ,
1.13.2 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb

-L174- / -L175- , Removing and Instal‐
ling, HID Headlamp
The Left Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L174- and the Right Day‐
time Running Lamp Bulb - L175- has the function of the Left
Position Lamp Bulb - M1- and the Right Position Lamp Bulb - M3- .
Removing
– Turn the housing cover -1- in the direction of the -arrow A- and
– Remove the Left Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L174- on the
handle -1- in the direction of the -arrow A- rearward from the
reflector.

– Remove the Left Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L174- from the
handle.
Installing
the following:
Caution


1.14 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and

Position Lamp LED Module - L176- / -
L177- , Removing and Installing
The Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp LED Module
- L176- / Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp LED
Module - L177- is only installed with HID headlamps.
The daytime running lamp and position lamp bulbs are LED lamps
and are integrated in the headlamp. Changing the LEDs is not
possible. The headlamp must be completely replaced.
– Headlamps, Removing and installing. Refer to
1.15 Left/Right Low Beam Headlamp Reflec‐

tor Motor -V294- / -V295- , Removing
and Installing
The Left Low Beam Headlamp Reflector Motor - V294- / Right
Low Beam Headlamp Reflector Motor - V295- is only installed with
HID headlamps without cornering lamps.
The low beam headlamp reflector motor sits in the headlamp and
cannot be replaced separately if it is faulty.
1.16 Left/Right Cornering Lamp Bulb - L148- /

-L149- , Removing and Installing
The Left Cornering Lamp Bulb - L148- / Right Cornering Lamp
Bulb - L149- is only installed with HID headlamps.
Removing
1. Headlamp 119
– Turn the housing cover -1- in the direction of the -arrow A- and
– Push upward in the direction of the -arrow A- on the bulb sock‐
et -1-.
– Remove the bulb socket -1- from the reflector -2-.
– Disconnect the connector.

Installing
the following:
Caution


1.17 Left/Right HID Headlamp Control Mod‐

ule - J343- / -J344- , Removing and In‐
stalling
WARNING

vironmental hazard.
headlamps. Refer to
page 2 .
Removing


– Remove the Left Hid Headlamp Control Module - J343- -1-
from the headlamp.
– Push the release buttons -4 and 6-.
– Disconnect the connectors -3 and 5-.
Installing
the following:
Caution
Make sure the seal fits correctly when installing the HID head‐
lamp control module. Water getting in the headlamp will cause
damage.
– Make sure the seal between the control module and the head‐
lamp is not damaged.
1.18 Left/Right Headlamp Power Output

Stage -J667- / -J668- , Removing and
Installing
The Left Headlamp Power Output Stage - J667- / Right Headlamp
Power Output Stage - J668- is only installed with HID headlamps
with cornering lamps.
WARNING

vironmental hazard.
headlamps. Refer to
page 2 .
Removing
– Remove the Left Headlamp Power Output Stage - J667- -1-
from the headlamp.
1. Headlamp 121
– Press the release button -4-.

Installing
the following:
Caution
damage.
1.19 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and

Position Lamp Control Module - J860- /
-J861- , Removing and Installing
The Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Mod‐
ule - J860- / Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp
Control Module - J861- is only installed with HID headlamps.
WARNING

vironmental hazard.
headlamps. Refer to
page 2 .
Removing
– Remove the Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp
Control Module - J860- -1- from the headlamp.

– Remove the control module.

Installing
the following:
Caution
damage.
1.20 Sensor for Left/Right Variable Head‐

lamp Positioning Motor - G695- / -
G696- , Removing and Installing
The Sensor for Left Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor -
G695- / Sensor for Right Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor -
G696- is only installed with HID headlamps.
The sensor for variable headlamp positioning motor is inside the
headlamp housing and cannot be replaced separately if it is faulty.
1.21 Left/Right Variable Headlamp Position‐

ing Motor -V446- / -V447- , Removing
and Installing
The Left Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor - V446- / Right
Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor - V447- is only installed with
HID headlamps.
The variable headlamp positioning motor sits in the headlamp
housing and cannot be replaced separately if it is faulty.
1.22 Left/Right Swivel Module Position Sen‐

sor -G474- / -G475- , Removing and
Installing
The Left Swivel Module Position Sensor - G474- / Right Swivel
Module Position Sensor - G475- is only installed with HID head‐
lamps.
The swivel module position sensor sits in the headlamp housing
and cannot be replaced separately if it is faulty.
1. Headlamp 123
1.23 Left/Right Adaptive Cornering Lamp

Motor - V318- / -V319- , Removing and
Installing
The Left Adaptive Cornering Lamp Motor - V318- / Right Adaptive
Cornering Lamp Motor - V319- is installed only with HID head‐
lamps.
The adaptive cornering lamp motor sits in the headlamp housing
and cannot be replaced separately if it is faulty.

2 Fog Lamps
⇒ “2.1 Overview - Fog Lamps”, page 125
⇒ “2.2 Fog Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 126
⇒ “2.3 Left/Right Front Fog Lamp Bulb L22 / L23 , Removing and
2.1 Overview - Fog Lamps

⇒ “2.1.1 Overview - Fog Lamps, Except GTI”, page 125
⇒ “2.1.2 Overview - Fog Lamps, GTI”, page 126
2.1.1 Overview - Fog Lamps, Except GTI
1 - Fog Lamp
❑ There are different ver‐
sions. Refer to the Parts
Catalog.
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.1 Fog Lamp, Re‐
Except GTI”,
page 126 .
2 - Cap
3 - Fog Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Front Fog Lamp
Bulb - L22-
❑ Right Front Fog Lamp
Bulb - L23-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.3 Left/Right Front
Fog Lamp Bulb L22 /
4 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
5 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
2. Fog Lamps 125

2.1.2 Overview - Fog Lamps, GTI
1 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
2 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
3 - Fog Lamp
❑ Changing the LEDs is
not possible. The fog
lamp must be complete‐
ly replaced.
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.2 Fog Lamp, Re‐
GTI”, page 127 .
2.2 Fog Lamp, Removing and Installing

⇒ “2.2.1 Fog Lamp, Removing and Installing, Except GTI”,
page 126
⇒ “2.2.2 Fog Lamp, Removing and Installing, GTI”, page 127
2.2.1 Fog Lamp, Removing and Installing, Ex‐

cept GTI
Removing
– Remove the wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner; Front Wheel Housing Lin‐
er, Removing and Installing .


– Pivot the fog lamp -2- in the direction of the -arrow A-.
– Remove the fog lamp -2- in the direction of the -arrow B- from
the bumper cover.
Installing
the following:
– Adjusting the fog lamps. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet
36.1 ; Procedure Descriptions .
♦ Refer to
⇒ “2.1.1 Overview - Fog Lamps, Except GTI”, page 125
2.2.2 Fog Lamp, Removing and Installing,

GTI
Removing
– Lift the fog lamp -4- in the direction of the -arrow A-.
– Remove the fog lamp -4- from the bumper cover.
Installing
the following:
– Adjusting the fog lamps. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet
36.1 ; Procedure Descriptions .
♦ Refer to ⇒ “2.1.2 Overview - Fog Lamps, GTI”, page 126
2.3 Left/Right Front Fog Lamp Bulb - L22- /

Removing
2. Fog Lamps 127

– Turn the steering to the right.

– Pry the cover -1- in the wheel housing liner in the direction of
the -arrow A-.
– Remove the cap -3- from the fog lamp housing -5-.
– Turn the Left Front Fog Lamp Bulb - L22- -2- in the direction
of the -arrow B- and remove from the fog lamp housing -5-.
– Remove the cap -3- from the Left Front Fog Lamp Bulb - L22-
-2-.
Installing
the following:
Caution

♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the cap. Wa‐
ter getting in the headlamp will cause damage.
– Push the cap -3- on the Left Front Fog Lamp Bulb - L22- -2-.
– Push the Left Front Fog Lamp Bulb - L22- -2- in the fog lamp
housing.
– Turn the Left Front Fog Lamp Bulb - L22- -2- clockwise until
stop.
– Check the fog lamp adjustment and adjust it if necessary. Re‐
fer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 ; Procedure Descriptions .

3 Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror

⇒ “3.1 Overview - Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror”,
page 129
⇒ “3.2 Turn Signal, Removing and Installing”, page 130
⇒ “3.3 Exterior Rearview Mirror Entry Lamp, Removing and In‐
3.1 Overview - Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror
1 - Mirror Cap
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ;
Exterior Rearview Mir‐
ror; Mirror Cap, Remov‐
ing and Installing .
2 - Screw
❑ 1 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
3 - Turn Signal
ling. Refer to
⇒ “3.2 Turn Signal, Re‐
page 130 .
4 - Bolt
❑ 9 Nm
5 - Bolt
❑ 9 Nm
6 - Clip
7 - Cap
8 - Mirror Glass
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ;
Exterior Rearview Mir‐
ror; Mirror Glass, Re‐
9 - Bolt
❑ Quantity: 2
tion. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Overview - Exterior Rearview
Mirror .
10 - Mirror Trim
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Mirror Trim,
11 - Bolt
❑ Quantity: 3
❑ Tightening specification. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Overview -
Exterior Rearview Mirror .
3. Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror 129

12 - Adjusting Unit
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Mirror Ad‐
justing Unit, Removing and Installing .
13 - Exterior Rearview Mirror Entry Lamp
❑ Driver Entry Lamp in Exterior Rearview Mirror - W52-
❑ Front Passenger Entry Lamp in Exterior Rearview Mirror - W53-
❑ Exterior rearview mirror entry lamp, removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “3.3 Exterior Rearview Mirror Entry Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 132 .
14 - Mirror Base
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Exterior
Rearview Mirror, Removing and Installing .
3.2 Turn Signal, Removing and Installing

The entire exterior mirror turn signal must be replaced if an LED
is faulty.

Removing
– Remove the mirror trim. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.
66 ; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Mirror Trim, Removing and In‐
stalling .
– Release the mounting tab if necessary.
– Remove the turn signal -2- from the mirror base -1- upward.
Installing
the following:
♦ Refer to
⇒ “3.1 Overview - Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror”,
page 129
3. Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror 131

3.3 Exterior Rearview Mirror Entry Lamp,

The entire exterior rearview mirror entry lamp must be replaced if
the LED is faulty.
Removing
– Mirror trim removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 66 ; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Mirror Trim, Removing
and Installing .
– Pry the Driver Entry Lamp in Exterior Rearview Mirror - W52-
-1- in the direction of the -arrow A-.
– Remove the Driver Entry Lamp in Exterior Rearview Mirror -
W52- -1- in the direction of the -arrow B- from the mirror
housing.
– Push the catches -3- in the direction of the -arrow C-.
Installing
the following:

4 Tail Lamps
⇒ “4.1 Overview - Body Tail Lamps”, page 133
⇒ “4.2 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps”, page 137
⇒ “4.3 Rear Lid Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 140
⇒ “4.4 Tail Lamp, Correcting Installed Position”, page 142
⇒ “4.5 Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 144
⇒ “4.6 Right and Left Tail Lamp Bulb M2 / M4 , Removing and
⇒ “4.7 Left/Right Rear Fog Lamp Bulb L46 / L47 , Removing and
⇒ “4.8 Left/Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb M21 / M22 , Removing
⇒ “4.9 Back-Up Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 152
⇒ “4.10 Turn Signal Bulb, Removing and Installing”, page 154
4.1 Overview - Body Tail Lamps

⇒ “4.1.1 Overview - Body Tail Lamps, Sedan, with Bulbs”,
page 133
⇒ “4.1.2 Overview - Body Tail Lamps, Sedan, with LED”,
page 135
⇒ “4.1.3 Overview - Body Tail Lamps, Wagon”, page 136
4.1.1 Overview - Body Tail Lamps, Sedan, with Bulbs
4. Tail Lamps 133

1 - Tail Lamp
❑ Left Tail Lamp - MX3-
❑ Right Tail Lamp - MX4-
❑ Body Tail Lamps
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.5 Tail Lamp, Re‐
page 144 .
2 - Brake and Tail Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Brake/Tail Lamp
Bulb - M21-
❑ Right Brake/Tail Lamp
Bulb - M22-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.8 Left/Right Brake/
Tail Lamp Bulb M21 /
3 - Bulb Socket
4 - Cover with Seal
5 - Fastening Element
❑ 2 Nm
6 - Bulb Socket
7 - Rear Turn Signal Bulb
❑ Left Rear Turn Signal
Bulb - M6-
❑ Right Rear Turn Signal
Bulb - M8-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.10 Turn Signal
Bulb, Removing and Installing”, page 154 .

4.1.2 Overview - Body Tail Lamps, Sedan, with LED
❑ 2 Nm
2 - Seal
❑ Self-adhesive
3 - Tail Lamp
❑ Body tail lamps
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.5 Tail Lamp, Re‐
page 144 .
4. Tail Lamps 135

4.1.3 Overview - Body Tail Lamps, Wagon
1 - Tail Lamp
❑ Body tail lamps
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.5.2 Tail Lamp, Re‐
Wagon”, page 145 .
2 - Rear Turn Signal Bulb
❑ Left Rear Turn Signal
Bulb - M6-
❑ Right Rear Turn Signal
Bulb - M8-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.10.2 Turn Signal
Bulb, Removing and In‐
stalling, Wagon”,
page 155 .
3 - Bulb Holder
4 - Seal
❑ 2 Nm
6 - Brake and Tail Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Brake/Tail Lamp
Bulb - M21-
❑ Right Brake/Tail Lamp
Bulb - M22-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.8.2 Left/Right
Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb
M21 / M22 , Removing and Installing, Wagon”, page 151 .

4.2 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps

⇒ “4.2.1 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps, Sedan, with Bulbs”,
page 137
⇒ “4.2.2 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps, Sedan, with LED”, page
138
⇒ “4.2.3 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps, Wagon”, page 139
4.2.1 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps, Sedan, with Bulbs
1 - Bulb Socket
❑ For Left Back-Up Lamp
Bulb - M16- / Right
Back-Up Lamp Bulb -
M17-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.9 Back-Up Lamp,
ling”, page 152 .
2 - Bulb Holder
3 - Rear Fog Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Rear Fog Lamp
Bulb - L46-
❑ Right Rear Fog Lamp
Bulb - L47-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.7 Left/Right Rear
Fog Lamp Bulb L46 /
4 - Tail Lamp
❑ Left Tail Lamp 2 - MX5-
❑ Right Tail Lamp 2 -
MX6-
❑ Tail lamp assembly in‐
side the rear lid
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.3 Rear Lid Tail
Lamp, Removing and
5 - Seal
❑ Self-adhesive
6 - Nut
❑ 3 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
7 - Tail Lamp Bulb
❑ Right Tail Lamp Bulb - M2-
❑ Left Tail Lamp Bulb - M4-
⇒ “4.6 Right and Left Tail Lamp Bulb M2 / M4 , Removing and Installing”, page 145 .
4. Tail Lamps 137

8 - Back-Up Lamp Bulb

❑ Left Back-Up Lamp Bulb - M16-
❑ Right Back-Up Lamp Bulb - M17-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “4.9 Back-Up Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 152 .
4.2.2 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps, Sedan, with LED
1 - Bulb Socket
Bulb - M16- / Right
Back-Up Lamp Bulb -
M17-
ling. Refer to
ling”, page 152 .
❑ Left Back-Up Lamp Bulb
- M16-
❑ Right Back-Up Lamp
Bulb - M17-
ling. Refer to
ling”, page 152 .
3 - Seal
❑ Self-adhesive
4 - Tail Lamp
MX6-
side the rear lid
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.3 Rear Lid Tail
Lamp, Removing and
5 - Nut
❑ 3 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2

4.2.3 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps, Wagon
1 - Bulb Socket
Bulb - M16- / Right
Back-Up Lamp Bulb -
M17-
ling. Refer to
ling”, page 152 .
2 - Bulb Holder
3 - Rear Fog Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Rear Fog Lamp
Bulb - L46-
❑ Right Rear Fog Lamp
Bulb - L47-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.7.2 Left/Right Rear
Fog Lamp Bulb L46 /
stalling, Wagon”,
page 149 .
4 - Tail Lamp
MX6-
side the rear lid
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.3.2 Rear Lid Tail
Lamp, Removing and
Installing, Wagon”,
page 141 .
5 - Nut
❑ 3 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
6 - Seal
❑ Self-adhesive
7 - Tail Lamp Bulb
❑ Right Tail Lamp Bulb - M2-
❑ Left Tail Lamp Bulb - M4-
⇒ “4.6.2 Right and Left Tail Lamp Bulb M2 / M4 , Removing and Installing, Wagon”, page 146 .
❑ Left Back-Up Lamp Bulb - M16-
❑ Right Back-Up Lamp Bulb - M17-
⇒ “4.9.2 Back-Up Lamp Bulb, Removing and Installing, Wagon”, page 153 .
4. Tail Lamps 139

4.3 Rear Lid Tail Lamp, Removing and In‐

stalling
⇒ “4.3.1 Rear Lid Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing, Sedan”,
page 140
⇒ “4.3.2 Rear Lid Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing, Wagon”,
page 141
4.3.1 Rear Lid Tail Lamp, Removing and In‐

stalling, Sedan
IF the LED is faulty, the tail lamp must be completely replaced.
Removing
Caution
Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available
adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.
– If necessity insert a narrow screwdriver in the opening on the

side.
– Pry up the cover -1- in the direction of -arrow-.
– Remove the nuts -1-.

– Remove the Left Tail Lamp 2 - MX5- -3- outward.

Installing
the following:
Make sure seal between body and tail lamp housing seals prop‐
erly.
The connector must lock into place.
– Pivot the Left Tail Lamp 2 - MX5- from the outside in the rear
lid opening.
– Align at the top and center.
– Starting at the top and then the bottom install the nuts on the
Left Tail Lamp 2 - MX5- and tighten.
♦ Refer to ⇒ “4.2 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps”, page 137
4.3.2 Rear Lid Tail Lamp, Removing and In‐

stalling, Wagon
Removing
Caution

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put for example commer‐
cially available adhesive tape over the component in the
visible area.
– If necessary insert a narrow screwdriver in the opening on the

side -1-.
– Remove the cover -2- in the direction of the -arrow A-.
4. Tail Lamps 141

– Remove the Left Tail Lamp 2 - MX5- -3- outward.

Installing
the following:
Note
♦ Make sure seal between body and tail lamp housing seals
properly.
♦ The connector must lock into place.
– Pivot the Left Tail Lamp 2 - MX5- from the outside in the rear
lid opening.
– Align at the top and center.
– Starting at the top and then the bottom install the nuts on the
Left Tail Lamp 2 - MX5- and tighten.
♦ Refer to
⇒ “4.2.3 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps, Wagon”, page 139
4.4 Tail Lamp, Correcting Installed Position

⇒ “4.4.1 Tail Lamp, Correcting Installed Position, Sedan”,
page 142
⇒ “4.4.2 Tail Lamp, Correcting Installed Position, Wagon”,
page 143
4.4.1 Tail Lamp, Correcting Installed Position,

Sedan
The installed position can only be corrected on the body tail lamp.
Procedure
– Open the cover in the luggage compartment side trim panel.

– Loosen the fastening element -1- two turns.

– Insert a suitable screwdriver in the trim openings -2-.
The tail lamp -3- must be flush with the neighboring components.
– Adjust the installation position of the tail lamp by tightening and
loosening the adjuster.
– Tighten the fastening element -1-.
– Close the cover in the luggage compartment side trim panel.
♦ Refer to ⇒ “4.1 Overview - Body Tail Lamps”, page 133
4.4.2 Tail Lamp, Correcting Installed Position,

Wagon
The installed position can only be corrected on the body tail lamp.
Procedure
– Remove the cover in the luggage compartment side trim pan‐
el.
– Loosen the fastening element -1- two turns.
– Insert a T10 screwdriver in the trim openings -2-.
The tail lamp -3- must be flush with the neighboring components.
– Adjust the installation position of the tail lamp by tightening or
loosening the adjuster.
– Tighten the fastening element -1-.
4. Tail Lamps 143

– Install the cover in the luggage compartment side trim panel.

♦ Refer to
4.5 Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing

⇒ “4.5.1 Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing, Sedan”, page 144
⇒ “4.5.2 Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing, Wagon”,
page 145
4.5.1 Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing, Se‐

dan
IF the LED is faulty, the tail lamp must be completely replaced.
Removing
– Remove the fastening element -1-.
– Remove the tail lamp -2- in the direction of the -arrow A-.
Installing
the following:
♦ Refer to ⇒ “4.1 Overview - Body Tail Lamps”, page 133

4.5.2 Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing,

Wagon
Removing
– Disconnect the connector.
– Remove the fastening element -1-.
– Remove the tail lamp -2- in the direction of the -arrow A-.
Installing
the following:
♦ Refer to
4.6 Right and Left Tail Lamp Bulb - M2- / -

M4- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “4.6.1 Right and Left Tail Lamp Bulb M2 / M4 , Removing and
Installing, Sedan”, page 145
⇒ “4.6.2 Right and Left Tail Lamp Bulb M2 / M4 , Removing and
Installing, Wagon”, page 146
4.6.1 Right and Left Tail Lamp Bulb - M2- / -

M4- , Removing and Installing, Sedan
Removing
Caution


side.
4. Tail Lamps 145


– Push the locking mechanisms -3- in the direction of the
-arrows A, B, and C-.
– Remove the bulb holder -1- from the tail lamp.
– Remove the tail lamp bulb -1- from the bulb holder -2-.
Installing
the following:
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the lamp.

4.6.2 Right and Left Tail Lamp Bulb - M2- / -

M4- , Removing and Installing, Wagon
Removing

Caution

visible area.

side -1-.

-arrows A and B-.
– Remove the tail lamp bulb -1- from the bulb holder -2-.
Installing
the following:
Caution

♦ Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.
4. Tail Lamps 147

4.7 Left/Right Rear Fog Lamp Bulb - L46- /

⇒ “4.7.1 Left/Right Rear Fog Lamp Bulb L46 / L47 , Removing
and Installing, Sedan”, page 148
⇒ “4.7.2 Left/Right Rear Fog Lamp Bulb L46 / L47 , Removing
and Installing, Wagon”, page 149
4.7.1 Left/Right Rear Fog Lamp Bulb - L46- /

-L47- , Removing and Installing, Sedan
Removing
Caution


side.

-arrows A, B and C-.

– Remove the rear fog lamp bulb -2- from the bulb holder -1-.
Installing
the following:
Caution

4.7.2 Left/Right Rear Fog Lamp Bulb -L46- / -

L47- , Removing and Installing, Wagon
Removing
Caution

visible area.

side -1-.
– Remove the cover -2- in the direction of the arrow -A-.
4. Tail Lamps 149


-arrows A and B-.
– Remove the rear fog lamp bulb -2- from the bulb holder -1-.
Installing
the following:
Caution

4.8 Left/Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb -M21- /

-M22- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “4.8.1 Left/Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb M21 / M22 , Removing
⇒ “4.8.2 Left/Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb M21 / M22 , Removing
4.8.1 Left/Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb - M21- /

-M22- , Removing and Installing, Sedan
Removing
– Remove the tail lamp from the body. Refer to
⇒ “4.5 Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 144 .
Caution
Do not turn the bulb socket.

Otherwise the bulb socket will be damaged.
Pull the bulb socket straight rearward, if necessary carefully
release the retaining tab with a suitable screwdriver.

– Pull the bulb socket -1- straight in the direction of the

-arrow A- out of the housing.
– Remove the brake/tail lamp bulb from the bulb socket.
Installing
the following:
Caution

4.8.2 Left/Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb - M21- /

-M22- , Removing and Installing, Wagon
Removing
page 145 .
– Push the mounting tabs -1- in the direction of the
– Remove the bulb holder -2-.
4. Tail Lamps 151

– Remove the brake and tail lamp bulb -1- in the direction of the
-arrow A- from the bulb holder.
Installing
the following:
Caution

4.9 Back-Up Lamp, Removing and Installing

⇒ “4.9.1 Back-Up Lamp Bulb, Removing and Installing, Sedan”,
page 152
⇒ “4.9.2 Back-Up Lamp Bulb, Removing and Installing, Wagon”,
page 153
4.9.1 Back-Up Lamp Bulb, Removing and In‐

stalling, Sedan
Removing
Caution


side.

– Turn the bulb socket -1- in the direction of the -arrow A-.
– Remove the bulb socket in the direction of the -arrow B- from
the tail lamp.
– Remove the bulb for the back-up lamp.
Installing
the following:
Caution

4.9.2 Back-Up Lamp Bulb, Removing and In‐

stalling, Wagon
Removing
Caution

visible area.

side -1-.
4. Tail Lamps 153

– Turn the bulb socket -1- in the direction of the -arrow A-.
– Remove the bulb socket in the direction of the -arrow B- from
the tail lamp.
– Remove the bulb for the back-up lamp.
Installing
the following:
Caution

4.10 Turn Signal Bulb, Removing and Instal‐

ling
⇒ “4.10.1 Turn Signal Bulb, Removing and Installing, Sedan”,
page 154
⇒ “4.10.2 Turn Signal Bulb, Removing and Installing, Wagon”,
page 155
4.10.1 Turn Signal Bulb, Removing and Instal‐

ling, Sedan
Removing
⇒ “4.5 Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 144 .

– Push the mounting tabs -2, 3 and 4- in the direction of the

- arrows A-.
– Remove the cover -1- from the tail lamp.
Caution
Do not turn the bulb socket.

Otherwise the bulb socket will be damaged.
Pull the bulb socket straight rearward, if necessary carefully
release the retaining tab with a suitable screwdriver.
– Pull the bulb socket -5- straight in the direction of the

-arrow B- out of the housing.
– Remove the turn signal bulb from the bulb socket.
Installing
the following:
Caution

4.10.2 Turn Signal Bulb, Removing and Instal‐

ling, Wagon
Removing
page 145 .
4. Tail Lamps 155

– Push the mounting tabs -1- in the direction of the

– Remove the bulb holder -2-.
– Remove the rear turn signal bulb -1- in the direction of the
-arrow A- from the bulb holder.
Installing
the following:
Caution


5 High-Mounted Brake Lamp

⇒ “5.1 Overview - High-Mounted Brake Lamp”, page 157
page 158
5.1 Overview - High-Mounted Brake Lamp

⇒ “5.1.1 Overview - High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Except GTI”,
page 157
⇒ “5.1.2 Overview - High-Mounted Brake Lamp, GTI”,
page 158
5.1.1 Overview - High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Except GTI
1 - Connector
❑ With High-Mounted
Brake Lamp Bulb - M25-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.1 High-Mounted
Brake Lamp, Removing
and Installing, Except
GTI”, page 158 .
5. High-Mounted Brake Lamp 157

5.1.2 Overview - High-Mounted Brake Lamp, GTI
1 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
2 - Connector
❑ With High-Mounted
Brake Lamp Bulb - M25-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.2 High-Mounted
Brake Lamp, Removing
and Installing, GTI”,
page 159 .
4 - Washer Fluid Hose Con‐
nection
5 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
6 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
7 - Roof Edge Spoiler
❑ Roof Edge Spoiler, Re‐
Refer to ⇒ Body Exteri‐
or; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Roof
Bars/Roof Rails .
5.2 High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Removing

and Installing
⇒ “5.2.1 High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Removing and Installing,
Except GTI”, page 158
⇒ “5.2.2 High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Removing and Installing,
GTI”, page 159
5.2.1 High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Removing

and Installing, Except GTI
♦ Trim Release Lever - Wedge - T10039/1-
Removing

Caution

– Cover the area of the rear lid above the brake light with a strip
of adhesive tape -1-.
Caution
When removing the high-mounted brake lamp, ensure seal is

not damaged.
– Install the -T10039/1- -1- on top between the high-mounted

brake lamp -2- and the rear lid.
– Push the high-mounted brake lamp -2- downward using the -
T10039/1- -1-.
– Pivot out the high-mounted brake lamp -2- from the rear lid.
– Remove the hose clip -arrow-.

– Remove the hose connection -1- from the high-mounted brake
lamp.
– Remove the high-mounted brake lamp.
Installing
During installation of the high-mounted brake lamp, ensure proper
seating of the seal. Seal must not have any bulges and must not
be damaged.
– Install the hose and connectors.
– Push the high-mounted brake lamp in the rear lid.
– Engage the upper hook.
– Engage the lower springs.
– Make sure the High-Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb - M25- and the
rear window washer system are working correctly.
5.2.2 High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Removing

and Installing, GTI
Removing
5. High-Mounted Brake Lamp 159


– Remove the spoiler on the edge of the roof. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Roof Bars/Roof Rails .
– Remove the bolts -1, 5 and 6- from the high-mounted brake
lamp -7-.
– Lift up the catches -2 and 4- to carefully loosen.
– Slightly lift the support bracket -3-.
– Remove the high-mounted brake lamp -7- from the spoiler on
the edge of the roof.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order of removal, noting
the following:
During installation of the high-mounted brake lamp, ensure proper
seating of the seal. Seal must not have any bulges and must not
be damaged.
– Make sure the High-Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb - M25- and the
rear window washer system are working correctly.
♦ Refer to
⇒ “5.1.2 Overview - High-Mounted Brake Lamp, GTI”,
page 158

6 License Plate Lamp

⇒ “6.1 Left/Right License Plate Lamp X4 / X5 , Removing and
⇒ “6.2 Left/Right License Plate Lamp Bulb X4 / X5 , Removing
6.1 Left/Right License Plate Lamp - X4- / -

X5- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “6.1.1 Left/Right License Plate Lamp X4 / X5 , Removing and
Installing, Wagon with LED”, page 161
Installing, Wagon with Bulb”, page 162
6.1.1 Left/Right License Plate Lamp -X4- / -

X5- , Removing and Installing, Sedan
The entire license plate lamp must be replaced if a license plate
lamp LED is faulty.
Removing
– Press the tab in the direction of -arrow- and remove the license
plate lamp downward from the bumper cover.
– Disconnect the connector -arrow-.

Installing
the following:
Insert the license plate lamp into the bumper cover so that the
connector is facing toward the left side of the vehicle.

X5- , Removing and Installing, Wagon
with LED
lamp LED is faulty.
6. License Plate Lamp 161

Removing
– Press the Left License Plate Lamp - X4- in the direction of the
-arrow A- using a suitable tool.
– Fold the Left License Plate Lamp - X4- in the direction of the
-arrow B- out of the rear lid.
– Remove the Left License Plate Lamp - X4- -2-.

Installing
the following:
Insert the license plate lamp into the rear lid so that the clip is
facing toward the right side of the vehicle.

X5- , Removing and Installing, Wagon
with Bulb
lamp LED is faulty.
Removing
-arrow A- using a suitable tool.
– Fold the Left License Plate Lamp - X4- in the direction of the
-arrow B- out of the rear lid.
– Press the connector safety catch -1- in the direction of the
-arrow A-.


Installing
the following:
Insert the Left License Plate Lamp - X4- into the rear lid so that
the connector is facing toward the right side of the vehicle.
– Insert the Left License Plate Lamp - X4- in the direction of the
-arrow 1- into the rear lid.
-arrow 2- until it locks into place.
6.2 Left/Right License Plate Lamp Bulb -

X4- / -X5- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “6.2.1 Left/Right License Plate Lamp Bulb X4 / X5 , Removing
⇒ “6.2.2 Left/Right License Plate Lamp Bulb X4 / X5 , Removing
6.2.1 Left/Right License Plate Lamp Bulb -

X4- / -X5- , Removing and Installing,
Sedan
lamp LED is faulty.
Removing
– Remove the license plate lamp. Refer to
⇒ “6.1.1 Left/Right License Plate Lamp X4 / X5 , Removing
and Installing, Sedan”, page 161 .

– Turn the lamp socket -1- in the direction of -arrow- to release

it and pull it out of the license plate lamp.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order of removal, noting
the following:
Caution

6.2.2 Left/Right License Plate Lamp Bulb -

X4- / -X5- , Removing and Installing,
Wagon
lamp LED is faulty.
Removing
– Remove the license plate lamp. Refer to
⇒ “6.1.3 Left/Right License Plate Lamp X4 / X5 , Removing
and Installing, Wagon with Bulb”, page 162 .
– If equipped, unclip the glass base bulb cover -1- from the li‐
cense plate lamp.

– Remove the glass base bulb -1- from the bulb socket.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Caution


7 Access/Start Authorization
⇒ “7.1 Component Location Overview - Access/Start Authoriza‐
tion System”, page 166
⇒ “7.2 Component Location Overview - Keyless Access Authori‐
zation System”, page 168
⇒ “7.3 Access/Start System Interface J965 , Removing and In‐
⇒ “7.4 Driver Exterior and Front Passenger Exterior Door Handle
Touch Sensor G415 / G416 , Removing and Installing”,
page 172
⇒ “7.5 Access/Start System Antenna 1 in Vehicle Interior R138 ,
⇒ “7.6 Driver Access/Start System Antenna R134 , Removing
⇒ “7.7 Front Passenger Access/Start System Antenna R135 ,
Removing and Installing ”, page 173
⇒ “7.8 Access/Start System Antenna in Luggage Compartment
R137 , Removing and Installing”, page 174
⇒ “7.9 Access/Start System Antenna in Rear Bumper R136 , Re‐
7.1 Component Location Overview - Access/Start Authorization System
Note
The component locations for the Sedan are shown. The component locations for the Wagon are identical.

1 - Anti-Theft Immobilizer
Reader Coil - D2-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “8.10.2 Anti-Theft Im‐
mobilizer Reader Coil
D2 , Removing and In‐
stalling, Vehicles with
Keyless Access”,
page 194 .
2 - Electronic Steering Column
Lock Control Module - J764-
ling. Refer to ⇒ Suspen‐
sion, Wheels, Steering;
Rep. Gr. 48 ; Steering
Column; Electronic
Steering Column Lock
Control Module - J764- ,
3 - Start System Button - E378-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.26 Start System
Button E378 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 273 .
❑ With Central Locking
and Anti-Theft Alarm
System Antenna - R47-
trol Modules”,
page 298 .
5 - Access/Start System Inter‐
face - J965-
⇒ “7.3 Access/Start System Interface J965 , Removing and Installing”, page 170 .
❑ Bracket screws (only for NAR): 2 Nm
7. Access/Start Authorization 167

7.2 Component Location Overview - Key‐

less Access Authorization System
⇒ “7.2.1 Component Location Overview - Front Keyless Access
Authorization System”, page 168
⇒ “7.2.2 Component Location Overview - Rear Keyless Access
Authorization System, Sedan”, page 169
⇒ “7.2.3 Component Location Overview - Rear Keyless Access
Authorization System, Wagon”, page 170
7.2.1 Component Location Overview - Front Keyless Access Authorization Sys‐

tem
Note
1 - Front Passenger Exterior

Door Handle
❑ With Front Passenger
Exterior Door Handle
Touch Sensor - G416-
removing and installing.
Refer to
⇒ “7.4 Driver Exterior
and Front Passenger
Exterior Door Handle
Touch Sensor G415 /
G416 , Removing and
❑ With Front Passenger
Access/Start System
Antenna - R135- , re‐
Refer to
⇒ “7.7 Front Passenger
Access/Start System
Antenna R135 , Remov‐
ing and Installing ”, page
173 .
2 - Access/Start System An‐
tenna 1 in Vehicle Interior -
R138-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “7.5 Access/Start
System Antenna 1 in
Vehicle Interior R138 ,
ling”, page 173 .
3 - Driver Side Exterior Door
Handle
❑ With Driver Exterior
Door Handle Touch
Sensor - G415- remov‐
⇒ “7.4 Driver Exterior and Front Passenger Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor G415 / G416 , Removing
❑ With Driver Access/Start System Antenna - R134- , removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “7.6 Driver Access/Start System Antenna R134 , Removing and Installing”, page 173 .

4 - Access/Start System Interface - J965-

❑ Bracket screws (only for NAR): 2 Nm
⇒ “7.3 Access/Start System Interface J965 , Removing and Installing”, page 170 .
7.2.2 Component Location Overview - Rear Keyless Access Authorization Sys‐

tem, Sedan

tenna In Luggage Compart‐
ment - R137-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “7.8.1 Access/Start
System Antenna in Lug‐
gage Compartment
R137 , Removing and
Installing, Sedan”,
page 174 .
face - J965-
❑ Bracket screws (only for
NAR): 2 Nm
ling. Refer to
System Interface J965 ,
ling”, page 170 .
tenna in Rear Bumper - R136-
ling. Refer to
System Antenna in Rear
Bumper R136 , Remov‐
175 .

7.2.3 Component Location Overview - Rear Keyless Access Authorization Sys‐

tem, Wagon

tenna in Rear Bumper - R136-
ling. Refer to
System Antenna in Rear
Bumper R136 , Remov‐
175 .
tenna In Luggage Compart‐
ment - R137-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “7.8.2 Access/Start
System Antenna in Lug‐
gage Compartment
R137 , Removing and
Installing, Wagon”,
page 174 .
face - J965-
❑ Bracket screws (only for
NAR): 2 Nm
ling. Refer to
System Interface J965 ,
ling”, page 170 .
7.3 Access/Start System Interface - J965- ,

⇒ “7.3.2 Access/Start System Interface J965 , Removing and
Installing ”, page 171
7.3.1 Access/Start System Interface - J965- ,

Removing and Installing, Except North
America
Removing

– Remove the footwell cover on the driver side. Refer to ⇒ Body

Interior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Covers;
Driver Side Footwell Cover, Removing and Installing .
– Remove the knee airbag with igniter. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 69 ; Knee Airbags; Overview - Knee Airbag .
– Push the bracket -2- upward in the direction of the -arrow A-
from the Access/Start System Interface - J965- -1-.
– Remove the Access/Start System Interface - J965- -1- in the
direction of the -arrow B- from the bracket -2-.
– To disconnect push the circlip -1- on the connector.

– Pry up the catch -1- using a small screwdriver in the direction
of the -arrow A- if necessary.
– Remove the bracket -2- in the direction of the -arrow B- from

the brace -3-.
Installing
the following:
– The bracket for the Access/Start System Interface - J965-
must engage audibly.
– The Access/Start System Interface - J965- must engage au‐
dibly in the bracket.
7.3.2 Access/Start System Interface - J965- ,

Removing


– Remove the glove compartment. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Covers; Glove
Compartment, Removing and Installing .
– Push the bracket -3- rearward in the direction of the
-arrow A- from the Access/Start System Interface - J965- -1-.
– Remove the Access/Start System Interface - J965- -1- in the
direction of the -arrow B- from the bracket -3-.
– To disconnect the connector press the circlip -1-.

– Remove the bolts -arrows- from the bracket -1-.
– Remove the bracket -1- from the heater and A/C unit.
Installing
the following:
– The Access/Start System Interface - J965- must engage au‐
dibly in the bracket.
♦ Refer to
⇒ “7.1 Component Location Overview - Access/Start Authori‐
zation System”, page 166
7.4 Driver Exterior and Front Passenger Ex‐

terior Door Handle Touch Sensor -
G415- / -G416- , Removing and Instal‐
ling
The Driver Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor - G415- and the
Front Passenger Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor - G416- is

integrated in the exterior door handle and cannot be replaced in‐

dividually if faulty.
– Door handle removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 57 ; Door Components; Door Handle, Removing and
Installing .
7.5 Access/Start System Antenna 1 in Ve‐

hicle Interior - R138- , Removing and
Installing
♦ Pry Lever - 80-200-
Removing
– Remove the center console insert. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 68 ; Center Console; Center Console Insert, Re‐
– Pry the Access/Start System Antenna 1 in Vehicle Interior -
R138- -1- using the -80-200- from the bracket -3-.
Installing
7.6 Driver Access/Start System Antenna -

R134- , Removing and Installing
The Driver Access/Start System Antenna - R134- is integrated
into the exterior door handle and cannot be replaces separately
if faulty.
Installing .
7.7 Front Passenger Access/Start System

Antenna - R135- , Removing and Instal‐
ling
The Front Passenger Access/Start System Antenna - R135- is
integrated into the exterior door handle and cannot be replaces
separately if faulty.
Installing .

7.8 Access/Start System Antenna in Lug‐

gage Compartment - R137- , Removing
and Installing
⇒ “7.8.1 Access/Start System Antenna in Luggage Compartment
R137 , Removing and Installing, Sedan”, page 174
⇒ “7.8.2 Access/Start System Antenna in Luggage Compartment
R137 , Removing and Installing, Wagon”, page 174
7.8.1 Access/Start System Antenna in Lug‐

and Installing, Sedan
♦ Pry Lever - 80-200-
Removing
– Remove the rear bench seat. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 72 ; Rear Seats; Bench Seat/Single Seat, Removing and
Installing .
– Fold back the carpet.
– Pry the Access/Start System Antenna in Luggage Compart‐
ment - R137- -1- using the -80-200- in the direction of the
-arrow A- from the body.
Installing
7.8.2 Access/Start System Antenna in Lug‐

and Installing, Wagon
♦ Pry Lever - 80-200-
Removing
– Remove the luggage compartment floor covering. Refer to ⇒
Rep. Gr. 70 ; Luggage Compartment Trim Panels; Overview
- Luggage Compartment Floor .

– Pry out the antenna -1- with the -80-200- in the direction of the
-arrow A- from the body.
Installing
7.9 Access/Start System Antenna in Rear

Bumper - R136- , Removing and Instal‐
ling
Removing
– Remove the rear bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63 ; Rear Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing .
– Pry the Access/Start System Antenna in Rear Bumper - R136-
-1- slightly in the direction of the -arrow A-.
– Remove the Access/Start System Antenna in Rear Bumper -
R136- -1- in the direction of the -arrow B- from the mount -3-.
Installing

8 Steering Column Switch Module

⇒ “8.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module”, page 176
⇒ “8.2 Lock Cylinder, Removing and Installing”, page 179
⇒ “8.3 Ignition Switch Key Lock Solenoid N376 , Removing and
⇒ “8.4 Ignition/Starter Switch, Removing and Installing”,
page 181
⇒ “8.5 Steering Column Switch Module, Removing and Installing”,
page 182
⇒ “8.6 Steering Column Electronics Control Module J527 , Re‐
⇒ “8.7 Turn Signal Switch E2 , Removing and Installing”,
page 192
⇒ “8.8 Cruise Control Switch E45 , Removing and Installing”,
page 194
⇒ “8.9 Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch E22 , Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page 194
⇒ “8.10 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil D2 , Removing and
⇒ “8.11 Steering Lock Housing, Removing and Installing”,
page 195
8.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch

Module
⇒ “8.1.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module with Me‐
chanical Ignition Switch”, page 176
⇒ “8.1.2 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module and Elec‐
tronic Ignition Switch”, page 178
8.1.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module with Mechanical Ignition Switch

1 - Ignition Key
2 - Lock Cylinder
ling. Refer to
⇒ “8.2 Lock Cylinder,
ling”, page 179 .
3 - Anti-Theft Immobilizer
Reader Coil - D2-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “8.10.1 Anti-Theft Im‐
mobilizer Reader Coil
D2 , Removing and In‐
stalling, Vehicles with
Ignition Key”,
page 194 .
4 - Mount
❑ With Turn Signal Switch
- E2- / Windshield Wiper
Intermittent Mode
Switch - E22-
❑ With cruise control: with
Cruise Control Switch -
E45-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “8.7 Turn Signal
Switch E2 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 192 .
5 - Steering Column Electron‐
ics Control Module - J527-
❑ With Airbag Spiral
Spring/Return Spring
with Slip Ring - F138-
⇒ “8.6 Steering Column Electronics Control Module J527 , Removing and Installing”, page 187 .
Caution
Risk of damaging the re‐
turn ring.
The
♦ return spring with
slip ring must not be
turned after removing.
6 - Screw
❑ 1 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
7 - Ignition/Starter Switch - D-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “8.4 Ignition/Starter Switch, Removing and Installing”, page 181 .
8 - Steering Lock Housing
⇒ “8.11 Steering Lock Housing, Removing and Installing”, page 195 .
9 - Screw
❑ 1 Nm
8. Steering Column Switch Module 177

10 - Ignition Switch Key Lock Solenoid - N376-

❑ For DSG transmission
⇒ “8.3 Ignition Switch Key Lock Solenoid N376 , Removing and Installing”, page 180 .
11 - Steering Column
12 - Bolt
❑ Quantity: 2
❑ For steering lock housing (shear bolt)
8.1.2 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module and Electronic Ignition Switch

ling. Refer to
and Installing”,
page 273 .
2 - Steering Column Electron‐
ics Control Module - J527-
❑ With Airbag Spiral
Spring/Return Spring
with Slip Ring - F138-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “8.6 Steering Column
Electronics Control
Module J527 , Remov‐
187 .
Caution
Risk of damaging the re‐
turn ring.
The
♦ return spring with
slip ring must not be
turned after removing.
3 - Screw
❑ 1 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
4 - Mount
❑ With Turn Signal Switch
- E2- , Windshield Wiper
Intermittent Mode
Switch - E22-
❑ With cruise control: with Cruise Control Switch - E45-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “8.7 Turn Signal Switch E2 , Removing and Installing”, page 192 .
5 - Electronic Steering Column Lock Control Module - J764-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 48 ; Steering Column;
Electronic Steering Column Lock Control Module - J764- , Removing and Installing
6 - Screw
❑ 1 Nm

7 - Steering Column
8 - Bolt
❑ Quantity: 2
❑ For Electronic Steering Column Lock Control Module - J764- (shear bolt)
9 - Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil - D2-
⇒ “8.10.2 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil D2 , Removing and Installing, Vehicles with Keyless Ac‐
cess”, page 194 .
10 - Ignition Key
8.2 Lock Cylinder, Removing and Installing

♦ Locking Pin (3 pc.) - T40011- or
♦ Suitable welding wire
For removing the lock cylinder, it may be necessary to fold in the
ignition key.
Removing
Right lock position is shown without ignition lock to provide a bet‐
ter illustration.
– Remove the lower steering column trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body
Lower Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and Installing .
– Turn the ignition key in the ignition “on” position. While doing
so the cut out in the trim -arrow- aligns with the hole in the
ignition lock.
– Fold the ignition key as far as it possible.

– Push in -T40011- or a suitable welding wire until stop in the

hole -2-.
– Remove the lock cylinder -1- from the steering lock housing.
WARNING
Risk of steering lock seizing.

♦ Steering lock must not be operated without a lock cylinder.
A blocked steering lock must be replaced.

The Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil - D2- is integrated in the
lock cylinder and cannot be replaced separately. If the Anti-Theft
Immobilizer Reader Coil - D2- is faulty, the complete lock cylinder
must be replaced.
With the vehicle-specific lock number, a new lock cylinder is or‐
dered through the distributor or importer using the VIN.
– Release and disconnect the connector from the Anti-Theft Im‐
mobilizer Reader Coil - D2- .
Installing
the following:
– Insert the ignition key into the lock cylinder and turn it to the
ignition “on” position.
– Push the -T40011- or a suitable welding wire back in the front
side hole until stop.
– Connect the connector to the Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader
Coil - D2- .
– Push in the lock cylinder -1- with the Anti-Theft Immobilizer

Reader Coil - D2- in the steering lock housing -3-.
– Remove the -T40011- from the hole -2-.
– Push the lock cylinder in securely until the locking mechanism
engages audibly.
8.3 Ignition Switch Key Lock Solenoid -

N376- , Removing and Installing
Removing

– Release the retainer in direction of -arrow A- and remove the

Ignition Switch Key Lock Solenoid - N376- -2- from the steering
lock housing -1- in direction of -arrow B-.
Installing
8.4 Ignition/Starter Switch, Removing and

Installing
Removing
– Release the clips -2 and 3- by inserting a suitable screwdriver
in the openings -arrows- in the steering lock housing -4-.
If the procedure is not possible because there is not enough

space, create a tool from two wire hooks as follows.
– Bend the one end of a welding wire to form a 1 mm eye.
– Cut the welding wire down to the length -a-.
♦ Dimension -a- = approximately 50 mm
– File the end of the wire hook into a point.
♦ Dimension -b- = 5 mm

– Remove the Ignition/Starter Switch - D- -5- from the steering

lock housing. The jeweler's screwdriver or wire hooks must
remain inserted.
Installing
the following:
– Insert the Ignition/Starter Switch - D- into the steering lock
housing until it audibly engages.
8.5 Steering Column Switch Module, Re‐

⇒ “8.5.1 Steering Column Switch Module, Removing and Instal‐
ling, Kostal”, page 182
⇒ “8.5.2 Steering Column Switch Module, Removing and Instal‐
ling, Valeo”, page 184
8.5.1 Steering Column Switch Module, Re‐

moving and Installing, Kostal
Removing
this.
– Remove the steering wheel. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels,
Steering; Rep. Gr. 48 ; Steering Wheel; Steering Wheel, Re‐
WARNING
Risk of destroying electronic components with static discharge.

♦ Before disconnecting the connector, discharge static elec‐
tricity from your body by touching a grounded vehicle
component such as the door striker pin.
– Remove the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow A-

and press down.


– Remove the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow B-
and press down.
– Push the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow C- and

– Remove the bolt -2- on the bottom.

– Remove the steering column switch module -1-.
Installing
the following:
– The following must be checked on the Steering Column Elec‐

tronics Control Module - J527- -3- before sliding on the steer‐
ing column switch module:
♦ The “arrows” -1- must align.
♦ The spiral spring -2- must be seen in the window between the
“arrows” -4-.
♦ Refer to
⇒ “8.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module”,
page 176
8.5.2 Steering Column Switch Module, Re‐

moving and Installing, Valeo
Removing
this.
WARNING

– Remove the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow A-

and press down.


– Remove the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow B-
and press down.
– Push the release -1- on both sides in the direction of the
-arrow A-.

– Slightly remove the steering column switch module -2-.

– Push the release -3- in the direction of the -arrow B-.
– Remove the steering column switch module -2-.
Installing
the following:
– The following must be checked on the Steering Column Elec‐
tronics Control Module - J527- -3- before sliding on the steer‐
ing column switch module:
“arrows” -4-.

8.6 Steering Column Electronics Control

Module - J527- , Removing and Instal‐
ling
⇒ “8.6.1 Steering Column Electronics Control Module J527 , Re‐
moving and Installing, Kostal”, page 187
⇒ “8.6.2 Steering Column Electronics Control Module J527 , Re‐
moving and Installing, Valeo”, page 189
8.6.1 Steering Column Electronics Control

ling, Kostal
The Airbag Spiral Spring/Return Spring with Slip Ring - F138- is
integrated into the Steering Column Electronics Control Module -
J527- .
Removing
– Position the front wheels straight-ahead. The steering wheel
is located in the neutral position.
this.
WARNING

– Push the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow A- and


– Push the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow B- and

– Remove the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow D-
and press down.
– Push the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow E- and
– Remove the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow F-
and press down.
– Release the mounting tabs in the direction of the
-arrows A and B-.

– Remove the Steering Column Electronics Control Module -

J527- -2- from the Steering Column Combination Switch -
E595- .
Installing
the following:
– Before sliding the Steering Column Electronics Control Mod‐

ule - J527- -3- the following must be checked.
“arrows” -4-.
– Make sure that all connectors are installed securely.
♦ Refer to
page 176
8.6.2 Steering Column Electronics Control

ling, Valeo
The Airbag Spiral Spring/Return Spring with Slip Ring - F138- is
integrated into the Steering Column Electronics Control Module -
J527- .
Removing
– Position the front wheels straight-ahead. The steering wheel
is located in the neutral position.
this.

WARNING

– Push the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow A- and

– Push the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow B- and

– Remove the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow D-
and press down.
– Push the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow E- and
190 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info
– Remove the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow F-

and press down.

J527- -2- from the Steering Column Combination Switch -
E595- .
Installing
the following:

– Before sliding the Steering Column Electronics Control Mod‐

ule - J527- -3- the following must be checked.
“arrows” -4-.
– Make sure that all connectors are installed securely.
♦ Refer to
page 176
8.7 Turn Signal Switch - E2- , Removing and

Installing
⇒ “8.7.1 Turn Signal Switch E2 , Removing and Installing, Kostal”,
page 192
⇒ “8.7.2 Turn Signal Switch E2 , Removing and Installing, Valeo”,
page 193
8.7.1 Turn Signal Switch - E2- , Removing and

Installing, Kostal
Turn Signal Switch - E2- , Cruise Control Switch - E45- and the
Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch - E22- together make
up the Steering Column Combination Switch - E595- .
The switch cannot be separated. If an individual switch is faulty
the Steering Column Combination Switch - E595- must be re‐
placed.
Removing
J527- . Refer to
⇒ “8.6 Steering Column Electronics Control Module J527 ,
– Remove the bolt -2- on the bottom.
– Remove the Steering Column Combination Switch - E595-
-1-.
Installing

8.7.2 Turn Signal Switch - E2- , Removing and

Installing, Valeo
placed.
Removing
J527- . Refer to
⇒ “8.6 Steering Column Electronics Control Module J527 ,
– Push the release -1- on both sides in the direction of the
-arrow A-.
– Slightly remove the Steering Column Combination Switch -

E595- -2-.

– Push the release -3- in the direction of the -arrow B-.

– Remove the Steering Column Combination Switch - E595-
-2-.
Installing
8.8 Cruise Control Switch - E45- , Removing

and Installing
placed.
– Turn Signal Switch - E2- , Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “8.7 Turn Signal Switch E2 , Removing and Installing”, page
192 .
8.9 Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode

Switch - E22- , Removing and Installing
placed.
– Turn Signal Switch - E2- , Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “8.7 Turn Signal Switch E2 , Removing and Installing”, page
192 .
8.10 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil -

D2- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “8.10.1 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil D2 , Removing and
Installing, Vehicles with Ignition Key”, page 194
⇒ “8.10.2 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil D2 , Removing and
Installing, Vehicles with Keyless Access”, page 194
8.10.1 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil -

D2- , Removing and Installing, Vehicles
with Ignition Key
The Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil - D2- is integrated in the
lock cylinder and cannot be replaced separately.
– Lock cylinder, removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “8.2 Lock Cylinder, Removing and Installing”, page 179 .
8.10.2 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil -

D2- , Removing and Installing, Vehicles
with Keyless Access
Removing


this.
– Remove the Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil - D2- -2- in the
direction of the -arrow A- from the mount -1-.
Installing
the following:
– Push in the Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil - D2- until it
engages audibly in the mount.
8.11 Steering Lock Housing, Removing and

Installing
♦ 7/16 Inch Extractor - T10424US-
Removing
– Remove the steering column switch module. Refer to
⇒ “8.5 Steering Column Switch Module, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 182 .
If the shear bolt cannot be removed using the -T10424US- , use
an angled hand drill and 8.5 mm diameter bit to drill it out.
– Remove the shear bolt -2- using the -T10424US- .
– Remove the steering lock housing -3-.
To replace the steering lock housing, the Ignition/Starter Switch -
D- and lock cylinder must be removed.
– Remove the Ignition/Starter Switch - D- . Refer to
⇒ “8.4 Ignition/Starter Switch, Removing and Installing”, page
181 .
– Remove lock cylinder. Refer to
⇒ “8.2 Lock Cylinder, Removing and Installing”, page 179 .
Installing
the following:

– Tighten the new bolts -arrows- until the head shears off.

9 Parking Aid
⇒ “9.1 Overview - Parking Aid”, page 197
⇒ “9.2 Parking Aid Control Module J446 , Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 200
⇒ “9.3 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H22 , Removing and
⇒ “9.4 Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H15 , Removing and
⇒ “9.5 Front Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page
203
⇒ “9.6 Rear Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”,
page 205
9.1 Overview - Parking Aid

⇒ “9.1.1 Overview - Front Parking Aid”, page 197
⇒ “9.1.2 Overview - Rear Parking Aid, Sedan”, page 199
⇒ “9.1.3 Overview - Rear Parking Aid, Wagon”, page 200
9.1.1 Overview - Front Parking Aid
Note
9. Parking Aid 197

1 - Front Parking Aid Warning

Buzzer - H22-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.3 Front Parking Aid
Warning Buzzer H22 ,
ling”, page 201 .
2 - Parking Aid Button - E266-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.12 Parking Aid But‐
ton E266 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 266 .
3 - Bracket
❑ For the Parking Aid
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.8 Parking Aid Con‐
trol Module J446 / Par‐
allel Parking Assistance
Control Module J791
Bracket, Removing and
4 - Parking Aid Control Module
- J446-
ling. Refer to
trol Module J446 , Re‐
page 200 .
5 - Left Front Parking Aid Sen‐
sor - G255-
⇒ “9.5 Front Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 203 .
6 - Left Front Center Parking Aid Sensor - G254-
7 - Right Front Center Parking Aid Sensor - G253-
8 - Right Front Parking Aid Sensor - G252-

9.1.2 Overview - Rear Parking Aid, Sedan
1 - Connector
2 - Expanding Clip
3 - Rear Parking Aid Warning
Buzzer - H15-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.4.1 Rear Parking
Aid Warning Buzzer
H15 , Removing and In‐
stalling, Sedan”,
page 202 .
4 - Expanding Clip
5 - Right Rear Parking Aid Sen‐
sor - G206-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.6 Rear Parking Aid
Sensor, Removing and
6 - Right Rear Center Parking
Aid Sensor - G205-
ling. Refer to
7 - Left Rear Center Parking
Aid Sensor - G204-
ling. Refer to
8 - Left Rear Parking Aid Sen‐
sor - G203-
⇒ “9.6 Rear Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 205 .
9 - Parking Aid Control Module - J446-
⇒ “9.2 Parking Aid Control Module J446 , Removing and Installing”, page 200 .
10 - Bracket
❑ For the Parking Aid Control Module - J446-
⇒ “2.8 Parking Aid Control Module J446 / Parallel Parking Assistance Control Module J791 Bracket,
9. Parking Aid 199

9.1.3 Overview - Rear Parking Aid, Wagon
1 - Expanding Clip
2 - Connector
3 - Expanding Clip
4 - Rear Parking Aid Warning
Buzzer - H15-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.4.2 Rear Parking
Aid Warning Buzzer
H15 , Removing and In‐
stalling, Wagon”,
page 202 .
5 - Right Rear Parking Aid Sen‐
sor - G206-
ling. Refer to
6 - Right Rear Center Parking
Aid Sensor - G205-
ling. Refer to
7 - Left Rear Center Parking
Aid Sensor - G204-
ling. Refer to
8 - Left Rear Parking Aid Sen‐
sor - G203-
⇒ “9.6 Rear Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 205 .
9 - Parking Aid Control Module - J446-
⇒ “9.2 Parking Aid Control Module J446 , Removing and Installing”, page 200 .
10 - Bracket
❑ For the Parking Aid Control Module - J446-
⇒ “2.8 Parking Aid Control Module J446 / Parallel Parking Assistance Control Module J791 Bracket,
9.2 Parking Aid Control Module - J446- , Re‐


Removing
– Remove the trim panel under the instrument panel. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and
Covers; Driver Side Instrument Panel Cover, Removing and
Installing .
– To do this push the tab -1-, pivot the retaining bracket in the
direction of -arrow- and remove the connector.
– Release the tab in direction of -arrow- and remove the Parking

Aid Control Module - J446- -3- downward from the bracket.
Installing
9.3 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer -

H22- , Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the trim panel under the instrument panel. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and
Covers; Driver Side Instrument Panel Cover, Removing and
Installing .
9. Parking Aid 201

– Remove the Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H22- -3- with
a narrow screwdriver -1- from the mount -2- in direction of
-arrows-.
– Remove the Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H22- .
Installing
9.4 Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer -

H15- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “9.4.1 Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H15 , Removing and
⇒ “9.4.2 Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H15 , Removing and
Installing, Wagon”, page 202
9.4.1 Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer -

H15- , Removing and Installing, Sedan
Removing
– Remove the C-pillar trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 70 ; Passenger Compartment Trim; C-Pillar Trim Panel,
– Pry off the expanding clip -1 and 3-.
– Remove the Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H15- -2-.
Installing
9.4.2 Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer -

H15- , Removing and Installing, Wagon
Removing
– Remove the luggage compartment side trim panel. Refer to ⇒
Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70 ; Luggage Compartment Trim Pan‐
els; Luggage Compartment Side Trim Panel, Removing and
Installing .

– Pry of the expanding clip -1 and 3-.

– Remove the Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H15- -4-.
Installing
9.5 Front Parking Aid Sensor, Removing

and Installing
Removing
– Remove the radiator grille. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.
66 ; Radiator Grille/Front Trim; Radiator Grille, Removing and
Installing .
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the components.

♦ Carefully remove the bumper. Pay attention that the
bumper is not deformed or ripped.
♦ When removing the headlamp the surface can be scratch‐
ed. Tape up those components which could be damaged.
– Remove the bolts -3- from the front wheel housing liner.
9. Parking Aid 203

– Remove the bolts between the bumper cover and lock carrier
from below.
– If equipped, remove the bolts -1-.
– Detach the bumper cover -2- from the fender and remove in
the direction of the -arrow A-.
– Press both catches in the direction of the -arrow A- and at the
same time press sensor -1- inward from outside.
Installing
the following:
When inserting sensor into sensor bracket, make sure that de‐
coupling ring (black silicone ring) has proper fit on the sensor
head.
Both sensor mount retaining clips must engage audibly when in‐
stalling the sensor.

9.6 Rear Parking Aid Sensor, Removing

and Installing
Removing
Outer Sensors
The outer rear parking aid sensor can be remove and installed
without removing the rear bumper.
Interior Sensor
– Remove the rear bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63 ; Rear Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing .

Installing
the following:
head.
9. Parking Aid 205

10 Parallel Parking Assist

⇒ “10.1 Overview - Parallel Parking Assist”, page 206
⇒ “10.2 Control Module, Removing and Installing”, page 207
⇒ “10.3 Front Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 208
⇒ “10.4 Rear Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 208
10.1 Overview - Parallel Parking Assist

⇒ “10.1.1 Overview - Parallel Parking Assist, Sedan”, page 206
⇒ “10.1.2 Overview - Parallel Parking Assist, Wagon”,
page 207
10.1.1 Overview - Parallel Parking Assist, Sedan
1 - Parallel Parking Assistance

Button - E581-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.13 Parallel Parking
Assistance Button
E581 , Removing and
2 - Rear Parallel Parking Assist
Sensor
❑ Left Rear Parallel Park‐
ing Assistance Sensor -
G716-
❑ Right Rear Parallel
Parking Assistance
Sensor - G717-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “10.4 Rear Sensor,
ling”, page 208 .
3 - Bracket
❑ For Parallel Parking As‐
sistance Control Module
- J791-
ling. Refer to
Control Module J791
ling. Refer to ⇒ “10.2 Control Module, Removing and Installing”, page 207 .
5 - Parallel Parking Assist Front Sensor
❑ Left Front Parallel Parking Assistance Sensor - G568-
❑ Right Front Parallel Parking Assistance Sensor - G569-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “10.3 Front Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 208 .

10.1.2 Overview - Parallel Parking Assist, Wagon

Button - E581-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.13 Parallel Parking
Assistance Button
E581 , Removing and
2 - Rear Parallel Parking Assist
Sensor
❑ Left Rear Parallel Park‐
ing Assistance Sensor -
G716-
❑ Right Rear Parallel
Parking Assistance
Sensor - G717-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “10.4 Rear Sensor,
ling”, page 208 .
3 - Bracket
❑ For Parallel Parking As‐
- J791-
ling. Refer to
Control Module J791
ling. Refer to ⇒ “10.2 Control Module, Removing and Installing”, page 207 .
5 - Parallel Parking Assist Front Sensor
❑ Left Front Parallel Parking Assistance Sensor - G568-
❑ Right Front Parallel Parking Assistance Sensor - G569-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “10.3 Front Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 208 .
10.2 Control Module, Removing and Instal‐

ling
The removal and installation of the Parallel Parking Assistance
Control Module - J791- is identical to the removal and installation
of the Parking Aid Control Module - J446- .
– Parking Aid Control Module - J446- , Removing and installing.
Refer to
⇒ “9.2 Parking Aid Control Module J446 , Removing and In‐
10. Parallel Parking Assist 207

10.3 Front Sensor, Removing and Installing

Removing
– Press both catches in the direction of the -arrows A- and at the
Installing
the following:
head.
10.4 Rear Sensor, Removing and Installing

Removing
– Remove the rear wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body Exte‐
rior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner; Rear Wheel Housing
Liner, Removing and Installing .
– Press both catches in the direction of the -arrows A- and at the
Installing
the following:
head.

11 Automatic Headlamp Range Control

⇒ “11.1 Overview - Automatic Headlamp Range Control”,
page 209
⇒ “11.1.2 Overview - Automatic Headlamp Range Control, Wag‐
on”, page 210
⇒ “11.2 Control Module for Headlamp Range/Cornering Lamp
and Headlamp Range, Removing and Installing”, page 211
11.1 Overview - Automatic Headlamp Range

Control
⇒ “11.1.1 Overview - Automatic Headlamp Range Control, Se‐
dan”, page 209
⇒ “11.1.2 Overview - Automatic Headlamp Range Control, Wag‐
on”, page 210
11.1.1 Overview - Automatic Headlamp Range Control, Sedan
1 - Expanding Clip
❑ Quantity: 2
2 - Control Module
❑ Without cornering
lamps: Headlamp
Range Control Module -
J431-
❑ With cornering lamps:
Cornering Lamp and
Headlamp Range Con‐
trol Module - J745-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “11.2 Control Module
for Headlamp Range/
Cornering Lamp and
Headlamp Range, Re‐
page 211 .
3 - Connector
4 - Left Rear Level Control Sys‐
tem Sensor - G76-
❑ On the rear control arm
Suspension, Wheels,
Steering; Rep. Gr. 43 ;
Level Control System
Sensor; Overview -
Rear Level Control Sys‐
tem Sensor .
5 - Left Front Level Control
System Sensor - G78-
❑ On the control arm in the
front
❑ For HID headlamp with
cornering lamp
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 43 ; Level Control System Sensor; Over‐
view - Front Level Control System Sensor .
11. Automatic Headlamp Range Control 209

6 - Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-

⇒ “1.8 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 , Removing and Installing”, page 111 .
7 - Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V49-
11.1.2 Overview - Automatic Headlamp Range Control, Wagon
1 - Expanding Clip
❑ Quantity: 2
2 - Control Module
❑ Without cornering
lamps: Headlamp
Range Control Module -
J431-
❑ With cornering lamps:
Cornering Lamp and
Headlamp Range Con‐
trol Module - J745-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “11.2 Control Module
for Headlamp Range/
Cornering Lamp and
Headlamp Range, Re‐
page 211 .
3 - Connector
4 - Left Rear Level Control Sys‐
tem Sensor - G76-
❑ On the rear control arm
Suspension, Wheels,
Level Control System
Sensor; Overview -
Rear Level Control Sys‐
tem Sensor .
5 - Left Front Level Control
System Sensor - G78-
❑ On the control arm in the
front
❑ For HID headlamp with
cornering lamp
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 43 ; Level Control System Sensor; Over‐
view - Front Level Control System Sensor .
6 - Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
7 - Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V49-

11.2 Control Module for Headlamp Range/

Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range,
Removing
– Remove the driver side instrument panel cover. Refer to ⇒
Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Cov‐
ers; Driver Side Instrument Panel Cover, Removing and In‐
stalling .
– If installed, remove the driver side knee airbag. Refer to ⇒
Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 69 ; Knee Airbags; Overview - Knee
Airbag .
– Release and remove the expanding clip -3-.
– Remove the control module -1- rearward.
– To do this push the tab -1-, pivot the retaining bracket in the
direction of -arrow- and remove the connector.
Installing
the following:
11. Automatic Headlamp Range Control 211

– Push the expanding clip -2- in the opening -3- on the control
module -1-.
– Lock the expanding clip by turning 90° in direction of -arrow-.

12 Trailer Hitch
⇒ “12.1 Overview - Trailer Hitch Socket”, page 213
⇒ “12.2 Trailer Socket U10 ”, page 214
⇒ “12.3 Towing Recognition Control Module J345 , Removing
12.1 Overview - Trailer Hitch Socket

⇒ “12.1.1 Overview - Trailer Hitch Socket, Sedan”, page 213
⇒ “12.1.2 Overview - Trailer Hitch Socket, Wagon”, page 214
12.1.1 Overview - Trailer Hitch Socket, Sedan
1 - Towing Recognition Control

Module - J345-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “12.3.1 Towing Rec‐
ognition Control Module
J345 , Removing and In‐
stalling, Sedan”,
page 215 .
2 - Frame
❑ For Towing Recognition
3 - Trailer Socket - U10-
❑ Connector assignment.
Refer to
⇒ “12.2 Trailer Socket
U10 ”, page 214 .
12. Trailer Hitch 213

12.1.2 Overview - Trailer Hitch Socket, Wagon
1 - Trailer Socket - U10-

❑ Connector assignment.
Refer to
⇒ “12.2 Trailer Socket
U10 ”, page 214 .
2 - Bolt
❑ 9 Nm
3 - Towing Recognition Control
Module - J345-
ling. Refer to
stalling, Wagon”,
page 215 .
4 - Control Module Bracket
❑ For Towing Recognition
ling. Refer to
stalling, Wagon”,
page 215 .
5 - Vehicle Tools Bracket
12.2 Trailer Socket - U10-

Characteristics of pin 9.
♦ Pin 9, continuous positive, supplies the trailer with positive
from the Battery - A- .
♦ The continuous positive is always connected directly with the
Battery - A- .
♦ Only low current is permitted, approximately 7.5 - 10 A.
Trailer Socket - U10- Connector Assignment.
The exact connector assignment can be found the applicable wir‐
ing diagram. Refer to ⇒ Wiring diagrams, Troubleshooting &
Component locations.

12.3 Towing Recognition Control Module -

J345- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “12.3.1 Towing Recognition Control Module J345 , Removing
⇒ “12.3.2 Towing Recognition Control Module J345 , Removing
12.3.1 Towing Recognition Control Module -

J345- , Removing and Installing, Sedan
Removing
– Remove the luggage compartment left trim panel. Refer to ⇒
Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70 ; Luggage Compartment Trim Pan‐
els; Luggage Compartment Side Trim Panel, Removing and
Installing .
– Push the clips -1- together in the direction of the -arrows A-.
– Remove the Towing Recognition Control Module - J345- -3-.
– Disconnect the connectors -2-.
Installing
12.3.2 Towing Recognition Control Module -

J345- , Removing and Installing, Wagon
Removing
– Remove the lid in the left luggage compartment side trim pan‐
el.
– Remove the vehicle tool kit.
12. Trailer Hitch 215


– Pull the vehicle tools bracket in the direction of -arrow A-.
– Disconnect the connectors -2-.
– Remove the vehicle tools bracket in the direction of
-arrow B- from the side panel.
– Push the catch -1- in the direction of the -arrow A-.
– Lift up the Towing Recognition Control Module - J345- -2- and

remove in the direction of the arrow -B-.
Installing
♦ Refer to
⇒ “12.1.2 Overview - Trailer Hitch Socket, Wagon”,
page 214

13 Blind Spot Detection

⇒ “13.1 Overview - Blind Spot Detection”, page 217
⇒ “13.2 Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in Left/Right Exterior
Mirror K303 / K304 , Removing and Installing”, page 219
⇒ “13.3 Blind Spot Detection Control Module J1086 / Blind Spot
Detection Control Module 2 J1087 , Removing and Installing”,
page 220
⇒ “13.4 Blind Spot Detection, Calibrating”, page 222
13.1 Overview - Blind Spot Detection

⇒ “13.1.1 Overview - Blind Spot Detection, Sedan”, page 217
⇒ “13.1.2 Overview - Blind Spot Detection, Wagon”, page 218
13.1.1 Overview - Blind Spot Detection, Sedan
1 - Blind Spot Detection Warn‐

ing Lamp in Left Exterior Mirror
- K303-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “13.2 Blind Spot De‐
tection Warning Lamp in
Left/Right Exterior Mir‐
ror K303 / K304 , Re‐
page 219 .
ing Lamp in Right Exterior Mir‐
ror - K304-
ling. Refer to
ror K303 / K304 , Re‐
page 219 .
3 - Bracket
4 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
5 - Connector
6 - Blind Spot Detection Con‐
trol Module - J1086-
❑ Master
ling. Refer to
⇒ “13.3.1 Blind Spot
Detection Control Mod‐
ule J1086 / Blind Spot
ule 2 J1087 , Removing
and Installing, Sedan”, page 220 .
7 - Bracket
❑ Lower attachment point
13. Blind Spot Detection 217

8 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
9 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
10 - Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 - J1087-
❑ Slave
⇒ “13.3.1 Blind Spot Detection Control Module J1086 / Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 J1087 ,
Removing and Installing, Sedan”, page 220 .
11 - Connector
12 - Nut
❑ 2 Nm
13 - Bracket
13.1.2 Overview - Blind Spot Detection, Wagon

ing Lamp in Left Exterior Mirror
- K303-
ling. Refer to
ror K303 / K304 , Re‐
page 219 .
ing Lamp in Right Exterior Mir‐
ror - K304-
ling. Refer to
ror K303 / K304 , Re‐
page 219 .
3 - Bracket
4 - Connector
5 - Bolt
❑ 2 Nm
6 - Blind Spot Detection Con‐
trol Module - J1086-
❑ Master
ling. Refer to
⇒ “13.3.2 Blind Spot
ule J1086 / Blind Spot
ule 2 J1087 , Removing
and Installing, Wagon”, page 221 .

7 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
8 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
9 - Bolt
❑ 2 Nm
10 - Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 - J1087-
❑ Slave
⇒ “13.3.2 Blind Spot Detection Control Module J1086 / Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 J1087 ,
Removing and Installing, Wagon”, page 221 .
11 - Bracket
12 - Connector
13 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
13.2 Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in

Left/Right Exterior Mirror - K303- / -
K304- , Removing and Installing
The Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in Left Exterior Mirror -
K303- / Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in Right Exterior
Mirror - K304- is located in the mirror glass and cannot be re‐
placed separately.
– Removing and installing the mirror glass. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Mirror Glass,

13.3 Blind Spot Detection Control Module -

J1086- / Blind Spot Detection Control
Module 2 - J1087- , Removing and In‐
stalling
⇒ “13.3.1 Blind Spot Detection Control Module J1086 / Blind Spot
Detection Control Module 2 J1087 , Removing and Installing, Se‐
dan”, page 220
Detection Control Module 2 J1087 , Removing and Installing,
Wagon”, page 221
13.3.1 Blind Spot Detection Control Module -

stalling, Sedan
Removing
– Remove the nut -1- and the screws -4- for the bracket.

– Remove the Blind Spot Detection Control Module - J1086- /

Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 - J1087- with the brack‐
et -1-.
Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 - J1087- -2- from the
bracket -1-.
Installing
the following:
Note
♦ The blind spot detection calibration normally occurs automat‐

ically.
♦ Static calibration is only required when there is a DTC memory
entry.
♦ Refer to
⇒ “13.1.1 Overview - Blind Spot Detection, Sedan”,
page 217

stalling, Wagon
Removing
– Remove the nuts -2- and bolts -4-.
Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 - J1087- with the brack‐
et -1-.


Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 - J1087- -2- from the
bracket -1-.
Installing
the following:
Note
♦ The blind spot detection calibration normally occurs automat‐

ically.
♦ Static calibration is only required when there is a DTC memory
entry.
♦ Refer to ⇒ “13.1 Overview - Blind Spot Detection”, page 217
13.4 Blind Spot Detection, Calibrating

⇒ “13.4.1 Preparing for Calibration”, page 222
13.4.1 Preparing for Calibration
Note
The vehicle in the illustration is only a basic outline.

1 - Volkswagen Logo
❑ The laser pointer is
aligned on the center of
the Volkswagen logo
2 - Calibration Tool - Wheel
Center Mountings -
VAS6350/1-
❑ With 17 mm wheel bolt
adapter and measure
paddle
3 - Calibration Tool - Lane
Change Calibration Tool -
VAS6350/4-
❑ Is moved from the left to
the right side of measur‐
ing field during calibra‐
tion
❑ When installed correct‐
ly, vehicle electrical sys‐
tem voltage line must be
connected at bottom left
of calibration device (as
seen in direction of trav‐
el)
❑ Height of the upper
edge of the calibration
device to the floor
♦ Sedan: 606 mm
♦ Wagon: 618 mm
4 - Calibration Unit -
VAS6350A-
5 - Calibration Tool - Linear La‐
ser - VAS6350/3-
❑ With “laser protective
eyewear”
❑ On the Calibration Unit - VAS6350A-
❑ Turning on and off. Refer to the Operating Instructions.
6 - Plastic Foot
❑ Quantity: 3
❑ Can be adjusted when setting the horizontal position of the Calibration Unit - VAS6350A-
7 - Calibration Tool - Spacing Laser - VAS6350/2-
❑ For distance measurement
❑ Usage information. Refer to the Operating Instructions.
8 - Measuring Scale
❑ For positioning the Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool Calibration Tool - Lane Change
Calibration Tool - VAS6350/4- .
❑ Dimension to be adjusted measuring point on steel ruler
♦ Sedan: 621 mm
♦ Wagon: 678 mm
9 - Level
❑ On the Calibration Unit - VAS6350A-
❑ To check the horizontal position of the Calibration Unit - VAS6350A-

10 - Catch Bracket
❑ To mount the Calibration Tool - Spacing Laser - VAS6350/2- for the distance measurement
❑ Distance to the Calibration Tool - Wheel Center Mountings - VAS6350/1- on the rear wheels: dimension
-a- = 1700 ± 2 mm
13.4.2 Calibration Preparation Work

♦ Calibration Unit - VAS6350A-
♦ Calibration Tool - Wheel Center Mountings - VAS6350/1-
♦ Calibration Tool - Spacing Laser - VAS6350/2-
♦ Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool - VAS6350/4-
♦ Vehicle Diagnostic Tester
Various preparation work procedures must be performed before
the actual calibration procedure using the Vehicle Diagnostic
Tester .
Requirements
• Move the vehicle onto a secure flat surface.
• Apply the parking brake - the vehicle must not move during the
measurement.
• Place the front wheels in a straight-ahead position - steering
wheel neutral position.
• No persons may be in the vehicle interior during the meas‐
urement.
• Do not open and close the vehicle doors during calibration.
Procedure
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .
– Tighten three wheel bolt adapters (17 mm) for the wheel bolts
on each -VAS6350/1- .
– Insert the measuring paddle on both -VAS6350/1- and secure
it with the locking nut.
– Place the -VAS6350/1- onto the wheel bolts on both rear
wheels.
• The wheel center sensor rotation center must be in wheel ro‐
tation center.
Note
Place the -VAS6350/1- on the wheels so that the “anti-theft wheel

bolts” are not connected with wheel center mounting.
– Adjust the measuring paddle using the lock nuts so that they
move freely just above the floor.
• The measuring paddles must move easily.
• The measuring paddles must be vertical.

– Position the -VAS6350A- at distance -a- to the rear wheels.

• Dimension -a- = 1700 ± 2 mm
– Switch on the -VAS6350/2- with the ON button.

Display on the -VAS6350/2- :
• “- - - m”
Note
The laser is switched on at same time.
– Hold the -VAS6350/2- -2- flush against the catch bracket, as

shown in the illustration, for the distance measurement.
• The -VAS6350/2- must lie firmly against the catch bracket.
– Make sure the “laser beam” for the distance measurement
contacts the paddle on lower enlarged part -1-.
If that is not the case, correct the measuring paddle height using
the locking nuts on the -VAS6350/1- .
– Briefly press the ON button for distance measurement.
Display on the -VAS6350/2- :
• “1,700 m” (specified value: 1700 ± 2 mm).
– Repeat the measurement procedure from the left catch brack‐
et to measuring paddle on left rear wheel.
• The distance value must be the same on both sides.
If both measured values are not the same, adjust the -VAS6350A-
accordingly.
Note

– Secure the Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool -

VAS6350/4- to the Calibration Unit - VAS6350A- mount on the
rear left side.
• When installed correctly, the vehicle electrical system voltage
line must be connected at bottom left of calibration device (as
seen in direction of travel).
• Sedan dimension -a- = 606 mm (measured from the upper
edge of the calibration device to workshop floor).
• Wagon dimension -a- = 618 mm (measured from the upper
– The adjustment dimension is set with the measuring point
-arrow- on the base of the calibration device on the scale of
the steel ruler -1-.
• Left adjustment dimension for Sedan = 621 mm (read on
measuring scale -1-).
• Left adjustment dimension for Wagon = 678 mm (read on
– Connect the Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool
Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool - VAS6350/4-
to the vehicle electrical system voltage.
– Using the bubble level (level indicator) -arrow-, bring the Cal‐
ibration Unit - VAS6350A- into a horizontal position by turning
the plastic bases.
– Wear laser protective eyewear.
Note
– Turn on the Calibration Laser - VAS6350/3A- on the Calibra‐

tion Unit - VAS6350A- .
– Align the entire Calibration Unit - VAS6350A- so that the laser
beam shines on the center of the vehicle rear above the VW
logo.

– Check right and left distance between catch bracket on the

Calibration Unit - VAS6350A- and measuring paddle -1- on
wheel mountings again.
• Specified value: 1700 ± 2 mm
Blind Spot Detection Control Module, Calibrating. Refer to
Detection Control Module 2 J1087 , Calibrating”, page 227 .

Module 2 - J1087- , Calibrating
♦ Vehicle Diagnostic Tester
Note
Before the actual calibration procedure for the control modules,

the Calibration Unit - VAS6350A- must be set up as described in
the chapter.
The following should not occur during the calibration procedure:

• Vehicle doors must not be opened or closed.
• People must not sit in the vehicle.
• People must not go between the vehicle and the Calibration
Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool - VAS6350/4- .
Procedure:
– Turn on the Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool -
VAS6350/4- at the power switch -3-.
• The green LED -1- must turn on.
Note
If the red LED -2- lights up: Check the Calibration Tool - Lane
Change Calibration Tool Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibra‐
tion Tool - VAS6350/4- .
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

– Select calibration.
– Follow the instructions in the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester dis‐
play.
Note

During the program sequence, there is a prompt to switch the

Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool - VAS6350/4-
from the left to the right side of the Calibration Tool - VAS6350- .
– Turn off the Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool -
VAS6350/4- and remove the calibration tool.
• When installed correctly, the vehicle electrical system voltage
line must be connected at bottom left of calibration device (as
seen in direction of travel).
• Sedan dimension -a- = 606 mm (measured from the upper
• Wagon dimension -a- = 618 mm (measured from the upper
• Right adjustment dimension for Sedan = 621 mm (read on
• Right adjustment dimension for Wagon = 678 mm (read on
– Turn on the -VAS6350/4- at the power switch -3-.

• The green LED -1- must turn on.
– Follow the instructions in the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester dis‐
play.
After a successful blind spot detection calibration, switch off the
ignition and disconnect the diagnostic connector.

14 Special Tools
♦ Trim Release Lever - Wedge - T10039/1-
♦ 7/16 Inch Extractor - T10424US-

♦ Locking Pin (3 pc.) - T40011- or
14. Special Tools 229

♦ Pry Lever - 80-200-

96 – Interior Lights, Switches
1. Lamps 231
1 Lamps
⇒ “1.1 Component Location Overview - Instrument Panel Lamps”,
page 233
⇒ “1.2 Component Location Overview - Front Door Lamps”, page
234
⇒ “1.3 Component Location Overview - Rear Door Lamps”, page
235
⇒ “1.4 Component Location Overview - Center Console Lamps”,
page 236
⇒ “1.5 Component Location Overview - Luggage Compartment
Lamps”, page 237
⇒ “1.6 Component Location Overview - Roof Trim Panel Lamps”,
page 239
⇒ “1.7 Glove Compartment Lamp W6 , Removing and Installing”,
page 241
⇒ “1.8 Bulb for Glove Compartment Lamp W6 , Replacing”, page
242
⇒ “1.9 Left/Right Front Footwell Lamp K268 / K269 , Removing
⇒ “1.10 Left/Right Front Footwell Illumination Bulb L151 / L152 ,
⇒ “1.11 Central Locking -Safe- Indicator Lamp K133 , Removing
⇒ “1.12 Left/Right Front Entry Lamp W31 / W32 , Removing and
⇒ “1.13 Entry Lamp Bulb, Removing and Installing”, page 246
⇒ “1.14 Driver/Front Passenger Door Warning Lamp W30 / W36 ,
⇒ “1.15 Driver/Front Passenger Door Opener Illumination Bulb
L108 / L109 , Removing and Installing”, page 246
⇒ “1.16 Left/Right Front Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 2 L203 /
L204 , Removing and Installing”, page 247
⇒ “1.17 Left/Right Rear Entry Lamp W33 / W34 , Removing and
⇒ “1.18 Left/Right Rear Door Warning Lamp W37 / W38 , Re‐
⇒ “1.19 Selector Lever Transmission Range Position Display Unit
Y26 , Removing and Installing”, page 248
⇒ “1.20 Luggage Compartment Lamp W3 , Removing and In‐
⇒ “1.21 Bulb for Luggage Compartment Lamp W3 , Removing
⇒ “1.22 Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp W20 / W14 ,
⇒ “1.23 Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp W20 / W14
Bulb, Removing and Installing”, page 251
⇒ “1.24 Front Interior Lamp W1 Bulb, Removing and Installing”,
page 252
⇒ “1.25 Rear Interior Lamp W43 Bulb, Removing and Installing”,
page 253
232 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

⇒ “1.26 Left/Right Rear Reading Lamp W11 / W12 , Removing

⇒ “1.27 Left/Right Rear Interior Lamp W47 / W48 , Replacing”,
page 254
1.1 Component Location Overview - Instrument Panel Lamps
1 - Passenger Airbag Indicator

Lamp - K145-
❑ Is removed together
with the Emergency
Flasher Switch - EX3- .
❑ Emergency Flasher
Switch - EX3- removing.
Refer to
⇒ “2.15 Emergency
Flasher Switch EX3 ,
ling”, page 268 .
2 - Glove Compartment Lamp
- W6-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.7 Glove Compart‐
ment Lamp W6 , Re‐
page 241 .
3 - Right Front Footwell Lamp
- K269-
ling. Refer to
Footwell Lamp K268 /
K269 , Removing and
4 - Left Front Footwell Lamp -
K268-
ling. Refer to
Footwell Lamp K268 /
K269 , Removing and
1. Lamps 233
1.2 Component Location Overview - Front Door Lamps
1 - Driver Door Opener Illumi‐

nation Bulb - L108-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.15 Driver/Front
Passenger Door Open‐
er Illumination Bulb
L108 / L109 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 246 .
2 - Central Locking -Safe- Indi‐
cator Lamp - K133-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.11 Central Locking
-Safe- Indicator Lamp
K133 , Removing and
3 - Driver Side Interior Door
Handle Illumination Lamp -
L219-
4 - Front Passenger Door
Opener Illumination Bulb -
L109-
ling. Refer to
Passenger Door Open‐
er Illumination Bulb
L108 / L109 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 246 .
5 - Right Front Door Ambient
Lighting Bulb 2 - L204-
ling. Refer to
Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 2 L203 / L204 , Removing and Installing”, page 247 .
6 - Passenger Side Interior Door Handle Illumination Lamp - L220-
7 - Door Warning Lamp and Entry Lamp
❑ Driver Door Warning Lamp - W30- / Passenger Side Entry Lamp - W93-
❑ Front Passenger Door Warning Lamp - W36- / Driver Side Entry Lamp - W92-
⇒ “1.14 Driver/Front Passenger Door Warning Lamp W30 / W36 , Removing and Installing”,
page 246 .
8 - Left Front Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 2 - L203-
⇒ “1.16 Left/Right Front Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 2 L203 / L204 , Removing and Installing”,
page 247 .

1.3 Component Location Overview - Rear Door Lamps
1 - Door Warning Lamp and

Entry Lamp
❑ Left Rear Door Warning
Lamp - W37- / Driver
Side Rear Entry Lamp -
W83-
❑ Right Rear Door Warn‐
ing Lamp - W38- / Pas‐
senger Side Rear Entry
Lamp - W84-
ling. Refer to
Door Warning Lamp
W37 / W38 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 248 .
1. Lamps 235
1.4 Component Location Overview - Center Console Lamps
1 - Selector Lever Transmis‐

sion Range Position Display
Unit - Y26-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.19 Selector Lever
Transmission Range
Position Display Unit
Y26 , Removing and In‐

1.5 Component Location Overview - Lug‐

gage Compartment Lamps
⇒ “1.5.1 Component Location Overview - Luggage Compartment
Lamps, Sedan”, page 237
⇒ “1.5.2 Component Location Overview - Luggage Compartment
Lamps, Wagon”, page 238
1.5.1 Component Location Overview - Luggage Compartment Lamps, Sedan
1 - Luggage Compartment
Lamp - W3-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.20.1 Luggage
Compartment Lamp
W3 , Removing and In‐
stalling, Sedan”,
page 248 .
1. Lamps 237
1.5.2 Component Location Overview - Luggage Compartment Lamps, Wagon
Lamp - W3-
ling. Refer to
Compartment Lamp
stalling, Wagon”,
page 249 .

1.6 Component Location Overview - Roof

Trim Panel Lamps
⇒ “1.6.1 Component Location Overview - Roof Trim Panel Lamps,
Sedan”, page 239
Wagon, without Panorama Roof”, page 240
Wagon, with Panorama Roof”, page 241
1.6.1 Component Location Overview - Roof Trim Panel Lamps, Sedan
1 - Driver Vanity Mirror Lamp -

W20-
ling. Refer to
Passenger Vanity Mirror
Lamp W20 / W14 , Re‐
page 250 .
2 - Rear Interior Lamp - WX2-
❑ With Left Rear Reading
Lamp - W11- / Right
Rear Reading Lamp -
W12-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.31 Rear Interior
Lamp/Reading Lamp,
ling”, page 275 .
❑ Bulb for Rear Interior
Lamp - W43- , Remov‐
ing and installing. Refer
to
Lamp W43 Bulb, Re‐
page 253 .
❑ Bulb for Left Rear Read‐
ing Lamp - W11- / Right
Rear Reading Lamp -
W12- , Removing and
installing. Refer to
page 253 .
3 - Front Passenger Vanity Mir‐
ror Lamp - W14-
⇒ “1.22 Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp W20 / W14 , Removing and Installing”, page 250 .
4 - Front Interior Lamp - WX1-
❑ With Driver Reading Lamp - W19- and Front Passenger Reading Lamp - W13-
⇒ “2.30 Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 275 .
❑ Bulb for Front Interior Lamp - WX1- , Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.24 Front Interior Lamp W1 Bulb, Removing and Installing”, page 252 .
1. Lamps 239
❑ Bulb for Driver Reading Lamp - W19- / Front Passenger Reading Lamp - W13- , Removing and installing.
Refer to ⇒ “1.24 Front Interior Lamp W1 Bulb, Removing and Installing”, page 252 .
1.6.2 Component Location Overview - Roof Trim Panel Lamps, Wagon, without
Panorama Roof

W20-
ling. Refer to
page 250 .
ror Lamp - W14-
ling. Refer to
page 250 .
3 - Rear Interior Lamp - WX2-
❑ With Left Rear Reading
Lamp - W11- / Right
Rear Reading Lamp -
W12-
ling. Refer to
Lamp/Reading Lamp,
ling”, page 275 .
❑ Bulb for Rear Interior
Lamp - W43- , Remov‐
ing and installing. Refer
to
page 253 .
❑ Bulb for Left Rear Read‐
ing Lamp - W11- / Right Rear Reading Lamp - W12- , Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.25 Rear Interior Lamp W43 Bulb, Removing and Installing”, page 253 .
4 - Luggage Compartment Lamp - W3-
⇒ “1.20.2 Luggage Compartment Lamp W3 , Removing and Installing, Wagon”, page 249 .

1.6.3 Component Location Overview - Roof Trim Panel Lamps, Wagon, with
Panorama Roof

W20-
ling. Refer to
page 250 .
2 - Left Rear Interior Lamp -
W47-
ling. Refer to
Interior Lamp W47 /
W48 , Replacing”,
page 254 .
Lamp - W3-
ling. Refer to
Compartment Lamp
stalling, Wagon”,
page 249 .
4 - Right Rear Interior Lamp -
W48-
ling. Refer to
Interior Lamp W47 /
W48 , Replacing”,
page 254 .
ror Lamp - W14-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.22 Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp W20 / W14 , Removing and Installing”, page 250 .
1.7 Glove Compartment Lamp - W6- , Re‐

For a Glove Compartment Lamp - W6- the lamp must be replaced
if there is a faulty LED
1. Lamps 241
Removing
– Push the retaining tab -1- with a flat-head screwdriver and pry
up the glove compartment lamp -2-.
Installing
the following:
– Insert the glove compartment lamp into the opening and en‐
gage on the opposite side.
1.8 Bulb for Glove Compartment Lamp -

W6- , Replacing
For a Glove Compartment Lamp - W6- the lamp must be replaced
if there is a faulty LED
Removing
– Remove the Glove Compartment Lamp - W6- . Refer to
⇒ “1.7 Glove Compartment Lamp W6 , Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 241 .
– Pry up the heat shield -2- when necessary on both sides ar‐
rows -A-.
– Remove the heat shield -2- from the Glove Compartment
Lamp - W6- -1-.
– Remove the bulb -1- from the bulb socket -2- on the back of
the glove compartment lamp.
Installing

1.9 Left/Right Front Footwell Lamp -K268- /

-K269- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “1.9.1 Left Front Footwell Lamp K268 , Removing and Instal‐
ling, Driver Side”, page 243
⇒ “1.9.2 Right Front Footwell Lamp K269 , Removing and Instal‐
ling, Front Passenger Side”, page 243
1.9.1 Left Front Footwell Lamp - K268- , Re‐

moving and Installing, Driver Side
For a footwell lamp the lamp must be replaced if there is a faulty
LED.
Removing
– Press the retaining tab -1- in the area of the -arrow A- with a
flat-head screwdriver.
– Pry up the footwell lamp -2-.
Installing
1.9.2 Right Front Footwell Lamp - K269- , Re‐

moving and Installing, Front Passenger
Side
For a footwell lamp the lamp must be replaced if there is a faulty
LED.
Removing
– Press the retaining tab -1- in the area of the -arrow A- with a
flat-head screwdriver.
– Pry up the footwell lamp -2-.
Installing
1. Lamps 243
1.10 Left/Right Front Footwell Illumination

Bulb -L151- / -L152- , Removing and In‐
stalling
For a front footwell lamp the lamp must be replaced if there is a
faulty LED.
Removing
– Remove the Left/Right Front Footwell Lamp -K268- / -K269- .
Refer to
⇒ “1.9 Left/Right Front Footwell Lamp K268 / K269 , Removing
– Pry up the heat shield -2- when necessary on both sides ar‐
rows -A-.
– Remove the heat shield -2- from the footwell lamp -1-.
– Remove the bulb -1- from the bulb socket -2- on the back of
the glove compartment lamp.
Installing
1.11 Central Locking -Safe- Indicator Lamp -

K133- , Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70 ; Front Door Trim Panels; Front Door Trim Panel,

– Press the tabs -arrows- and remove the Central Locking -Safe-
Indicator Lamp - K133- -1- from the door trim panel.
– Release and disconnect the connector -1- from the Central

Locking -Safe- Indicator Lamp - K133- -2-.
Installing
1.12 Left/Right Front Entry Lamp -W31- / -

W32- , Removing and Installing
♦ Trim Removal Wedge - 3409-
Removal and installation for all entry lamps is performed in the
same way and is only described for one lamp.
♦ Left Front Entry Lamp - W31-
♦ Right Front Entry Lamp - W32-
♦ Left Rear Entry Lamp - W33-
♦ Right Rear Entry Lamp - W34-
Check the entry lamps using the output diagnostic test mode on
each door control module.
Caution

Removing
– Pry out the lamp carefully using -3409- or a screwdriver.
1. Lamps 245
– Disconnect the connector and remove the lamp.

Installing
1.13 Entry Lamp Bulb, Removing and Instal‐

ling
Removing
– Remove the front entry lamp. Refer to
⇒ “1.12 Left/Right Front Entry Lamp W31 / W32 , Removing
– Pry the diffusion lens carefully out of the housing in direction
of -arrow-.
– Remove the bulb -1- straight out of the socket.

Installing
1.14 Driver/Front Passenger Door Warning

Lamp -W30- / -W36- , Removing and In‐
stalling
The door warning lamp and the entry lamp make up one compo‐
nent. The can be remove and installed together.
– Entry Lamp, Removing and installing. Refer to
1.15 Driver/Front Passenger Door Opener Il‐

lumination Bulb -L108- / -L109- , Re‐

Caution
There is a risk of damaging the fiber-optic cable.

♦ Only touch the fiber-optic cable on the light fittings in the
area of the interior door mechanism.
Removing
Finger Position on the Fiber-Optic Cable
1 - Fiber-optic cable
A - Index and middle fingers
B - Thumb
– Disengage the fiber-optic cable on the front bracket -1- in the
direction of the arrow -A-.
– Carefully lift the fiber-optic cable -3- in the direction of the ar‐
row -B- and pivot from the interior door mechanism -4-.
– Remove the fiber-optic cable from the mount -2-.

Installing
1.16 Left/Right Front Door Ambient Lighting

Bulb 2 - L203- / -L204- , Removing and
Installing
The Left Front Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 2 - L203- and the Right
Front Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 2 - L204- are integrated in the
door trim panel decorative strip and cannot be replaced individu‐
ally.
– Remove the front door trim panel decorative strip. Refer to ⇒
Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70 ; Front Door Trim Panels; Overview
- Front Door Trim Panel .
1.17 Left/Right Rear Entry Lamp -W33- / -

Removal and installation for all entry lamps is performed in the
same way and is only described for one lamp.
1. Lamps 247

1.18 Left/Right Rear Door Warning Lamp -

W37- / -W38- , Removing and Installing
The door warning lamp and the entry lamp make up one compo‐
nent. The can be remove and installed together.
1.19 Selector Lever Transmission Range Po‐

sition Display Unit - Y26- , Removing
and Installing
The Selector Lever Transmission Range Position Display Unit -
Y26- -1- is integrated in the selector lever boot and cannot be
replaced individually.
Removing
– Remove the selector lever boot. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 34 ;
Selector Mechanism; Selector Lever Handle, Removing and
Installing .
Installing
1.20 Luggage Compartment Lamp - W3- ,

⇒ “1.20.1 Luggage Compartment Lamp W3 , Removing and In‐
stalling, Sedan”, page 248
⇒ “1.20.2 Luggage Compartment Lamp W3 , Removing and In‐
stalling, Wagon”, page 249
1.20.1 Luggage Compartment Lamp - W3- ,

Removing and Installing, Sedan
Caution

Removing

– Push the retaining tab -1- with a flat-head screwdriver and pry
up the Luggage Compartment Lamp - W3- -2-.
Installing
the following:
– Insert the luggage compartment lamp into the opening and
engage on the opposite side.
1.20.2 Luggage Compartment Lamp - W3- ,

Removing and Installing, Wagon
Removing
Caution

– Push the Luggage Compartment Lamp - W3- -1- in the direc‐

tion of the -arrow A- with a flat-head screwdriver.
– Fold the Luggage Compartment Lamp - W3- in the direction
of the -arrow B- out of the roof trim panel.
Installing
the following:
– Insert the luggage compartment lamp into the opening and
engage on the opposite side.
1.21 Bulb for Luggage Compartment Lamp -

⇒ “1.21.1 Bulb for Luggage Compartment Lamp W3 , Removing
⇒ “1.21.2 Bulb for Luggage Compartment Lamp W3 , Removing
1.21.1 Bulb for Luggage Compartment Lamp -

W3- , Removing and Installing, Sedan
Removing
– Remove the Luggage Compartment Lamp - W3- . Refer to
⇒ “1.20.1 Luggage Compartment Lamp W3 , Removing and
Installing, Sedan”, page 248 .
1. Lamps 249
– Pry up the heat shield -2- when necessary on both sides at

both arrows -A-.
– Remove the heat shield -2- from the Luggage Compartment
Lamp - W3- -1-.
– Push the contact plate -1- for the lamp in the direction of
-arrow-.
– Remove the tubular bulb -2- out of the bulb socket.

Installing
1.21.2 Bulb for Luggage Compartment Lamp -

W3- , Removing and Installing, Wagon
Removing
– Remove the Luggage Compartment Lamp - W3- . Refer to
⇒ “1.20.2 Luggage Compartment Lamp W3 , Removing and
Installing, Wagon”, page 249 .
-arrow-.
Installing
1.22 Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror

Lamp -W20- / -W14- , Removing and In‐
stalling
For the vanity mirror illumination the lamp must be completely
replaced if there is a faulty LED.

Caution

Removing
– Swivel the sun visor forward.
– Pry out the vanity mirror illumination -1- at the cut-out
-arrow B- using a flat-blade screwdriver.
Installing
the following:
– Insert the vanity mirror lamp into the opening and latch it on
the opposite side.
1.23 Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror

Lamp -W20- / -W14- Bulb, Removing
and Installing
For the vanity mirror illumination the lamp must be completely
replaced if there is a faulty LED.
Removing
– Remove the illuminated vanity mirror. Refer to
⇒ “1.22 Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp W20 /
W14 , Removing and Installing”, page 250 .
-arrow-.
Installing
1. Lamps 251
1.24 Front Interior Lamp - W1- Bulb, Remov‐

ing and Installing
⇒ “1.24.1 Front Interior Lamp W1 Bulb, Removing and Installing,
LED”, page 252
⇒ “1.24.2 Front Interior Lamp W1 Bulb, Removing and Installing,
with Bulbs”, page 252
1.24.1 Front Interior Lamp - W1- Bulb, Remov‐

ing and Installing, LED
The bulb for the Front Interior Lamp - WX1- and the bulb for the
Driver Reading Lamp - W19- / Front Passenger Reading Lamp -
W13- are the same component.
If the Front Interior Lamp - WX1- and Driver Reading Lamp -
W19- / Front Passenger Reading Lamp - W13- is faulty, the
diffusion lens must be replaced.
Caution

Removing
– Pry the diffusion lens in the marked areas -arrows- using the
-3409- from the Front Interior Lamp - W1- .
– Release and disconnect the connectors.
Installing
1.24.2 Front Interior Lamp - W1- Bulb, Remov‐

ing and Installing, with Bulbs
The bulb for the Front Interior Lamp - WX1- and the bulb for the
Driver Reading Lamp - W19- / Front Passenger Reading Lamp -
W13- are the same component.

Caution

Removing
-3409- from the Front Interior Lamp - W1- .
– Remove the bulb -1- in the direction of the -arrow A- from the
bulb socket.
Installing
the following:
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the bulb.

1.25 Rear Interior Lamp - W43- Bulb, Remov‐

ing and Installing
⇒ “1.25.1 Rear Interior Lamp W43 Bulb, Removing and Installing,
with Bulbs”, page 253
⇒ “1.25.2 Rear Interior Lamp W43 Bulb, Removing and Installing,
LED”, page 254
1.25.1 Rear Interior Lamp - W43- Bulb, Remov‐

ing and Installing, with Bulbs
The Rear Interior Lamp - W43- bulb and the Left Rear Reading
Lamp - W11- and Right Rear Reading Lamp - W12- bulb are one
component.
1. Lamps 253
Removing
– Pry up the diffusion lens -3- for the Rear Interior Lamp - W43-
using the -3409- .
– Remove the bulb -1- in the direction of the -arrow A- from the
bulb socket -2-.
Installing
the following:
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the bulb.

1.25.2 Rear Interior Lamp - W43- Bulb, Remov‐

ing and Installing, LED
The Rear Interior Lamp - W43- bulb and the Left Rear Reading
Lamp - W11- and Right Rear Reading Lamp - W12- bulb are one
component.
The entire interior lamp must be replaced if the Rear Interior Lamp
- W43- is faulty.
– Rear Interior Lamp - W43- removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.31 Rear Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and In‐
1.26 Left/Right Rear Reading Lamp -W11- / -

The Left Rear Reading Lamp - W11- bulb and the Rear Interior
Lamp - W43- bulb are the same component.
– Left Rear Reading Lamp - W11- / Right Rear Reading Lamp -
W12- bulb removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.25 Rear Interior Lamp W43 Bulb, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 253 .
1.27 Left/Right Rear Interior Lamp -W47- / -

W48- , Replacing

Note
The entire interior lamp must be replaced if there is a defective

bulb in the Left Rear Interior Lamp - W47- / Right Rear Interior
Lamp - W48- .
Removing
– Remove the headliner. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70 ;
Roof Trim Panels; Headliner, Removing and Installing .
– Handle the headliner carefully and lay it on a clean surface.
– If equipped, remove adhesive on the catches -1- with a suita‐
ble tool.
– Press the catches -1- and tilt the interior lamp out of the bracket
-2-.
– Also use a -3409- , if necessary, to pry the lamp -1- out of the
bracket -arrow-.
1. Lamps 255
– Unclip the interior lamp -1- at the pivot points -arrow- on both
sides of the lamp out of the bracket -2- using the -3409- .
– Disconnect the connector from the interior lamp.
Installing

2. Controls 257
2 Controls
⇒ “2.1 Component Location Overview - Instrument Panel Con‐
trols”, page 259
⇒ “2.2 Component Location Overview - Controls in Front Doors”,
page 260
⇒ “2.3 Component Location Overview - Controls in Rear Doors”,
page 261
⇒ “2.4 Component Location Overview - Controls in Center Con‐
sole”, page 262
⇒ “2.5 Component Location Overview - Controls in Luggage
Compartment”, page 263
⇒ “2.6 Component Location Overview - Controls in Roof Trim
Panel”, page 264
⇒ “2.7 Rotary Light Switch EX1 , Removing and Installing”, page
265
⇒ “2.8 Headlamp Range Control Adjuster E102 , Removing and
⇒ “2.9 Driving Profile Selection Button E735 , Removing and In‐
⇒ “2.10 Start/Stop Mode Button E693 , Removing and Installing”,
page 266
⇒ “2.11 ASR/ESP Button E256 , Removing and Installing”, page
266
⇒ “2.12 Parking Aid Button E266 , Removing and Installing”, page
266
⇒ “2.13 Parallel Parking Assistance Button E581 , Removing and
⇒ “2.14 Center Console Switch Module 1 and 2 EX23 / EX30 ,
⇒ “2.15 Emergency Flasher Switch EX3 , Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 268
⇒ “2.16 Left/Right Seat Heating Button E653 / E654 , Removing
⇒ “2.17 Glove Compartment Lamp Switch E26 , Removing and
⇒ “2.18 Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster EX11 , Removing and
⇒ “2.19 Power Window Control Head in Driver Door E512 , Re‐
⇒ “2.20 Front Passenger Power Window Button E716 , Removing
⇒ “2.21 Driver Interior Locking Button E308 , Removing and In‐
⇒ “2.22 Interior Monitoring And Vehicle Inclination Deactivation
Button E616 , Removing and Installing”, page 272
⇒ “2.23 Driver and Front Passenger Door Contact Switch F2 / F3 ,
⇒ “2.24 Driver and Passenger Side Rear Power Window Button
E711 / E713 , Removing and Installing”, page 273
⇒ “2.25 Left/Right Rear Door Contact Switch F10 / F11 , Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page 273

⇒ “2.26 Start System Button E378 , Removing and Installing”,

page 273
⇒ “2.27 Rear Lid Contact Switch, Removing and Installing”, page
274
⇒ “2.28 Driver and Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp Contact
Switch F147 / F148 , Removing and Installing”, page 274
⇒ “2.29 Sunroof Button E325 , Removing and Installing”,
page 274
⇒ “2.30 Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and In‐
⇒ “2.31 Rear Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 275
⇒ “2.32 Left/Right Front Reading Lamp Button E633 / E634 , Re‐
2.1 Component Location Overview - Instrument Panel Controls
1 - Emergency Flasher Switch

- EX3-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.15 Emergency
Flasher Switch EX3 ,
ling”, page 268 .
2 - Glove Compartment Lamp
Switch - E26-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.17 Glove Compart‐
ment Lamp Switch E26 ,
ling”, page 269 .
3 - Front Passenger Airbag De‐
activation Key Switch - E224-
Front Passenger Air‐
bag; Front Passenger
Airbag Deactivation Key
Switch, Removing and
Installing .
4 - Right Seat Heating Button -
E654-
❑ Integrated in the display
control head:
♦ Heater Control Module -
J65- or
♦ A/C Control Module - J301-
or
♦ Climatronic Control Module
- J255-
❑ Cannot be replaced separately if faulty.
❑ Heater Control Module - J65- / A/C Control Module - J301- / Climatronic Control Module - J255- removing
and installing. Refer to ⇒ Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning; Rep. Gr. 87 ; Component Location
Overview - Display And Control Unit .
2. Controls 259
5 - Left Seat Heating Button - E653-

❑ Integrated in the display control head:
♦ Heater Control Module - J65- or
♦ A/C Control Module - J301- or
♦ Climatronic Control Module - J255-
❑ Cannot be replaced separately if faulty.
❑ Heater Control Module - J65- / A/C Control Module - J301- / Climatronic Control Module - J255- removing
and installing. Refer to ⇒ Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning; Rep. Gr. 87 ; Component Location
Overview - Display And Control Unit .
6 - Headlamp Range Control Adjuster - E102-
⇒ “2.8 Headlamp Range Control Adjuster E102 , Removing and Installing”, page 265 .
7 - Rotary Light Switch - EX1-
⇒ “2.7 Rotary Light Switch EX1 , Removing and Installing”, page 265 .
2.2 Component Location Overview - Controls in Front Doors
1 - Driver Interior Locking But‐

ton - E308-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.21 Driver Interior
Locking Button E308 ,
ling”, page 271 .
2 - Exterior Rearview Mirror
Adjuster - EX11-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.18 Exterior Rear‐
view Mirror Adjuster
EX11 , Removing and
3 - Front Passenger Power
Window Button - E716-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.20 Front Passen‐
ger Power Window But‐
ton E716 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 271 .
4 - Power Window Control
Head In Driver Door - E512-
❑ With:
♦ Driver Power Window But‐
ton - E710-
♦ Front Passenger Power
♦ Driver Side Rear Power
♦ Passenger Side Rear Pow‐
er Window Button - E713-

♦ Child Safety Lock Button - E318-

⇒ “2.19 Power Window Control Head in Driver Door E512 , Removing and Installing”, page 270 .
No Illustration
♦ Interior Monitoring and Vehicle Inclination Deactivation Button
- E616- . Refer to
⇒ “2.22 Interior Monitoring And Vehicle Inclination Deactiva‐
tion Button E616 , Removing and Installing”, page 272 .
♦ Driver Door Contact Switch - F2- and Front Passenger Door
Contact Switch - F3- . Refer to
⇒ “2.23 Driver and Front Passenger Door Contact Switch F2 /
F3 , Removing and Installing”, page 273 .
2.3 Component Location Overview - Controls in Rear Doors
1 - Driver Side Rear Power

ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.24 Driver and Pas‐
senger Side Rear Pow‐
er Window Button
E711 / E713 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 273 .
2 - Passenger Side Rear Pow‐
er Window Button - E713-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.24 Driver and Pas‐
senger Side Rear Pow‐
er Window Button
E711 / E713 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 273 .
No Illustration
♦ Left Rear Door Contact Switch - F10- and Right Rear Door
Contact Switch - F11- . Refer to
⇒ “2.25 Left/Right Rear Door Contact Switch F10 / F11 , Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 273 .
2. Controls 261
2.4 Component Location Overview - Controls in Center Console

ling. Refer to
and Installing”,
page 273 .
2 - Center Console Switch
Module 2 - EX30-
♦ Parking Aid Button - E266-
♦ Parallel Parking Assistance
Button - E581-
❑ The individual buttons
are installed in the
switch module and can‐
not be replaced sepa‐
rately.
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.14 Center Console
Switch Module 1 and 2
EX23 / EX30 , Remov‐
267 .
3 - Center Console Switch
Module 1 - EX23-
♦ ASR/ESP Button - E256-
♦ Driving Program Button -
E598-
♦ Start/Stop Mode Button -
E693-
❑ The individual buttons
are installed in the
switch module and can‐
not be replaced sepa‐
rately.
⇒ “2.14 Center Console Switch Module 1 and 2 EX23 / EX30 , Removing and Installing”, page 267 .

2.5 Component Location Overview - Controls in Luggage Compartment
1 - Rear Lid Contact Switch

❑ Rear Lid Alarm Switch -
F123-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.27 Rear Lid Con‐
tact Switch, Removing
and Installing”,
page 274 .
2. Controls 263
2.6 Component Location Overview - Controls in Roof Trim Panel
1 - Driver Vanity Mirror Lamp

Contact Switch - F147-
❑ Cannot be replaced
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.28 Driver and Front
Lamp Contact Switch
F147 / F148 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 274 .
2 - Rear Interior Lamp - W43-
Button
❑ In the Rear Interior
Lamp - WX2-
ling. Refer to
Lamp/Reading Lamp,
ling”, page 275 .
ror Lamp Contact Switch -
F148-
❑ Cannot be replaced
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.28 Driver and Front
Lamp Contact Switch
F147 / F148 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 274 .
4 - Rear Interior Lamp - W43-
Button
❑ In the Front Interior Lamp - WX1-
5 - Right Front Reading Lamp Button - E634-
⇒ “2.32 Left/Right Front Reading Lamp Button E633 / E634 , Removing and Installing”, page 277 .
6 - Left Front Reading Lamp Button - E633-
⇒ “2.32 Left/Right Front Reading Lamp Button E633 / E634 , Removing and Installing”, page 277 .
7 - Front Interior Lamp - W1- Button
8 - Sunroof Button - E325-
❑ Bolt: 1 Nm

❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “2.29 Sunroof Button E325 , Removing and Installing”, page 274 .
2.7 Rotary Light Switch - EX1- , Removing

and Installing
Removing
– Push in the Rotary Light Switch - EX1- rotary handle -1- op‐
posite the direction of the -arrow A- and turn in the direction of
the -arrow B-.
– Hold the rotary handle -1- in this position.
– Remove the entire Rotary Light Switch - EX1- in the direction
of the -arrow A- from the instrument panel.
– Disconnect the connectors -arrow A-.
– Remove the Rotary Light Switch - EX1- -1-.

Installing
the following:
– Tighten the Rotary Light Switch - EX1- and push in the light
switch rotary handle in direction of -arrow 1- and at the same
time turn right in direction of - arrow 2-.
– Hold the rotary handle in this position and install the Rotary
Light Switch - EX1- in the instrument panel -3-.
– Turn the rotary handle to “0” to lock the switch in the instrument
panel.
2.8 Headlamp Range Control Adjuster -

E102- , Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the Rotary Light Switch - EX1- . Refer to
⇒ “2.7 Rotary Light Switch EX1 , Removing and Installing”,
page 265 .
2. Controls 265

– Remove the trim -2- using the Headlamp Range Control Ad‐
juster - E102- from the instrument panel.
– Push the catches on the Headlamp Range Control Adjuster -

E102- -1- in the direction of the -arrow A-.
– Push the Headlamp Range Control Adjuster - E102- -1-.
Installing
2.9 Driving Profile Selection Button - E735- ,

Removing and installing. Refer to
2.10 Start/Stop Mode Button - E693- , Re‐

2.11 ASR/ESP Button - E256- , Removing

and Installing
2.12 Parking Aid Button - E266- , Removing

and Installing
2.13 Parallel Parking Assistance Button -


2.14 Center Console Switch Module 1 and 2

-EX23- / -EX30- , Removing and Instal‐
ling
The following buttons are installed on the left and right sides of
the selector lever, depending on the vehicle equipment, in two
button modules. The same procedure is used to remove and in‐
stall the following components. The procedure is only described
for one button module. A removed button module cannot be dis‐
assembled.
Center Console Switch Module 1 - EX23-
♦ Driving Profile Selection Button - E735-
♦ Start/Stop Mode Button - E693-
♦ ASR/ESP Button - E256-
Center Console Switch Module 2 - EX30-
♦ Parking Aid Button - E266-
♦ Parallel Parking Assistance Button - E581-
Caution

Removing
Installing .
– Pry the trim -1- up using the -3409- .
2. Controls 267
– Lift the driver side button module -1- or the front passenger
side button module -2- upward from the center console.
– Remove the button module -2-.

Installing
2.15 Emergency Flasher Switch - EX3- , Re‐

Removing
– Grasp the Front Passenger Airbag -Disabled- Indicator Lamp
- K145- -1- at the side -A arrows- and remove from the instru‐
ment panel.
– Loosen the catches -1-.
– Push the Emergency Flasher Switch - EX3- -2- out of the Front
Passenger Airbag -Disabled- Indicator Lamp - K145- in the
direction of the -arrow A-.
Installing

2.16 Left/Right Seat Heating Button -E653- /

-E654- , Removing and Installing
The seat heating buttons are integrated in the Heater Control
Module - J65- / A/C Control Module - J301- / Climatronic Control
Module - J255- display control head. Components cannot be re‐
placed separately if faulty.
– Heater Control Module - J65- / A/C Control Module - J301- /
Climatronic Control Module - J255- removing and installing.
Refer to ⇒ Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning; Rep.
Gr. 87 ; Component Location Overview - Display And Control
Unit .
2.17 Glove Compartment Lamp Switch -

Removing
– Open the glove compartment.
– Push the left and right glove compartment stop -1- in the up‐
ward direction of the -arrow-.
– Open the glove compartment lid -2-.
– Open the glove compartment lid completely in the direction of
the -arrow B- so that the steering rack -2- is removed from the
damper -1-.
– Remove the Glove Compartment Lamp Switch - E26- in the

damper -1- from the mount in the direction of the -arrow A-.
Installing
2.18 Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster -

EX11- , Removing and Installing
Caution

2. Controls 269
Removing
– Carefully release the retainers using a small screwdriver
-arrows-.
– Remove the Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster - EX11- -1-
from the exterior rearview mirror adjuster trim -2-.
– If necessity remove the Driver Interior Locking Button - E308- .
Refer to
⇒ “2.21 Driver Interior Locking Button E308 , Removing and
Installing
the following:
– If necessity install the Driver Interior Locking Button - E308- .
Refer to
⇒ “2.21 Driver Interior Locking Button E308 , Removing and
2.19 Power Window Control Head in Driver

Door - E512- , Removing and Installing
Removing
– Push the catches on the trim -1- for the Power Window Control
Head in Driver Door - E512- in the direction of the -arrow A-.
– Remove the trim -1- for the Power Window Control Head in
Driver Door - E512- in the direction of the -arrow B- from the
door trim panel.
– Release the hook -3- on both sides with a small screwdriver.

– Remove the Power Window Control Head in Driver Door -

E512- -2- from the trim -1-.
Installing
2.20 Front Passenger Power Window Button

- E716- , Removing and Installing
Removing
– Release the hook in the direction of the -arrow A- with a small
screwdriver.
– Release the mounting tab -2- in the direction of the
-arrow B-.
– Remove the window regulator switch -3- from the switch
mount and remove it to the rear.
Installing
2.21 Driver Interior Locking Button - E308- ,

Removing
– Remove the Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster - EX11- . Refer
to
⇒ “2.18 Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster EX11 , Removing
– Release the retainers -arrows-.
2. Controls 271
– Remove the Driver Interior Locking Button - E308- -1- from the
Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster - EX11- -2- trim.
Installing
the following:
– The Driver Interior Locking Button - E308- must engage audi‐
bly in the trim for the Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster -
EX11- .
2.22 Interior Monitoring And Vehicle Inclina‐

tion Deactivation Button - E616- , Re‐
Caution

Removing
– Pry out the Interior Monitoring and Vehicle Inclination Deacti‐
vation Button - E616- -1- using the -3409- or a screwdriver at
the lower edge.
– Remove the button from the B-pillar trim panel.
Installing

2.23 Driver and Front Passenger Door Con‐

tact Switch - F2- / -F3- , Removing and
Installing
The door contact switch is installed in the door lock and cannot
be replaced individually when faulty.
– Removing and installing the front door lock. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 57 ; Door Components; Door Lock, Re‐
2.24 Driver and Passenger Side Rear Power

Window Button -E711- / -E713- , Re‐
Removing
– Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70 ; Rear Door Trim Panels; Rear Door Trim Panel,
– Release the hook in the direction of the -arrow A- with a small
screwdriver.
– Release the mounting tab -2- in the direction of the
-arrow B-.
– Remove the window regulator switch -3- from the switch
mount and remove it to the rear.
Installing
2.25 Left/Right Rear Door Contact Switch -

F10- / -F11- , Removing and Installing
The door contact switch is installed in the door lock and cannot
be replaced individually when faulty.
– Removing and installing the rear door lock. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 58 ; Door Components; Door Lock, Re‐
2.26 Start System Button - E378- , Removing

and Installing
Removing
2. Controls 273

Installing .
– Remove the Start System Button - E378- -1- from below out
of the center console -2-. The clips are opened at the same
time.
Installing
2.27 Rear Lid Contact Switch, Removing and

Installing
The rear lid contact switch is installed in the rear lid latch and
cannot be replaced separately.
– Rear Lid Latch, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Ex‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 55 ; Rear Lid; Lid Latch, Removing and
Installing .
2.28 Driver and Front Passenger Vanity Mir‐

ror Lamp Contact Switch - F147- / -
F148- , Removing and Installing
The vanity mirror contact switch is installed in the sun visor mount
and cannot be replaced separately if faulty.
– Sun Visor, removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 68 ; Equipment; Sun Visor, Removing and Installing .
2.29 Sunroof Button - E325- , Removing and

Installing
Removing
– Remove the Front Interior Lamp - WX1- . Refer to
– Remove the button -1- from the interior lamp.
Installing
♦ Refer to
⇒ “2.6 Component Location Overview - Controls in Roof Trim
Panel”, page 264

2.30 Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Re‐

The switch module is a component of the Front Interior Lamp -
WX1- and cannot be removed separately.
Removing
– Remove the mirror base cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 68 ; Rearview Mirror; Overview - Rearview Mirror .
-3409- from the Front Interior Lamp - WX1- .
Only Front Interior Lamp - WX1- with LED-Technology
All Versions
– Push the catches in the direction of the -arrow A- and remove
the Front Interior Lamp - WX1- .

Installing
the following:
– Install the Front Interior Lamp - WX1- in the roof opening.
– Install the diffusion lens in the Front Interior Lamp - WX1- .
2.31 Rear Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Re‐

The button is a permanent component of the Rear Interior Lamp
- WX2- and cannot be removed separately.
Caution

The Rear Interior Lamp - WX2- is held in place by a dual-stage

locking mechanism.
Removing
2. Controls 275

– Pry the diffusion lens -1- with a narrow screwdriver in the di‐
rection of the -arrow A-.
– Remove the diffusion lens -1- from the Rear Interior Lamp -
WX2- -2-.
– Release the catches -2- with a narrow screwdriver in the di‐
rection of the -arrow A-.
– Push the locking mechanism -1- in the direction of the

-arrow B-.
– Remove the Rear Interior Lamp - WX2- -1- out of the roof
opening in the direction of the -arrow A-.
– Release the connector safety catch in the direction of the
-arrow B- and disconnect the connector in the direction of the
-arrow C-.
Installing
the following:
Note
The connector must point in the direction of travel/
– Push the locking mechanism -1- opposite the direction of the

-arrow B-. The catches -2- must engage securely.

2.32 Left/Right Front Reading Lamp Button -

E633- / -E634- , Removing and Installing
The Left Front Reading Lamp Button - E633- / Right Front Read‐
ing Lamp Button - E634- is a component of the Front Interior Lamp
- WX1- and cannot be replaced separately.
2. Controls 277
3 Anti-Theft Alarm System

⇒ “3.1 Overview - Interior Monitoring”, page 278
⇒ “3.2 Alarm Horn H12 , Removing and Installing”, page 279
⇒ “3.3 Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor G578 , Removing and
3.1 Overview - Interior Monitoring
Note
1 - Anti-Theft Alarm System

Sensor - G578-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “3.3 Anti-Theft Alarm
System Sensor G578 ,
ling”, page 279 .
❑ After replacing adjust.
Refer to
⇒ “3.3 Anti-Theft Alarm
System Sensor G578 ,
ling”, page 279 .
2 - Screw
❑ 1 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2 or 4, de‐
pending on version
3 - Cover
ling. Refer to
⇒ “3.3.2 Anti-Theft
Alarm System Sensor
G578 , Removing and
Installing, Version with
Four Screws”,
page 281 .
4 - Interior Monitoring And Ve‐
hicle Inclination Deactivation
Button - E616-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.22 Interior Monitor‐
ing And Vehicle Inclina‐
tion Deactivation Button
E616 , Removing and
5 - Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519-
❑ With Central Locking and Anti-Theft Alarm System Antenna - R47-
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒ “2.2 Overview - Control Modules”, page 298 .
6 - Alarm Horn - H12-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “3.2 Alarm Horn H12 , Removing and Installing”, page 279 .

7 - Nut
❑ 9 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
8 - Bracket
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “3.2 Alarm Horn H12 , Removing and Installing”, page 279 .
9 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
3.2 Alarm Horn - H12- , Removing and In‐

stalling
Removing
– Remove the plenum chamber cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 50 ; Bulkhead; Plenum Chamber Cover, Removing
and Installing .
– Remove the alarm horn -1- with the bracket -4- from the ple‐
num chamber.
– If necessity remove the nut -2-.
– Remove the alarm horn -1- from the bracket -4-.
Installing
the following:
♦ Refer to ⇒ “3.1 Overview - Interior Monitoring”, page 278
3.3 Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor -

G578- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “3.3.1 Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor G578 , Removing and
Installing, Version with Two Screws”, page 279
⇒ “3.3.2 Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor G578 , Removing and
Installing, Version with Four Screws”, page 281
3.3.1 Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor -

G578- , Removing and Installing, Ver‐
sion with Two Screws
Removing
3. Anti-Theft Alarm System 279


– Remove the roof module -1- in the direction of the -arrow A-.

-arrows A and B-.
– Remove the Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor - G578- -1- from
the roof module.
– Release the mounting tabs in the direction of the arrows
-A and B-.
– Remove the individual sensor -1- from the roof module.

Installing
the following:
If the Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor - G578- is being replaced,
then it must be adapted using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

3.3.2 Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor -

G578- , Removing and Installing, Ver‐
sion with Four Screws
Caution

Removing
– Using the -3409- pry the cover -1- in the area of the -arrows-.
– Remove the roof module -2-.
– Release the mounting tabs in the direction of the arrows

-A and B-.
– Remove the Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor - G578- -1- from
the roof module.
-arrows A and B-.
3. Anti-Theft Alarm System 281

– Remove the individual sensor -1- from the roof module.

Installing
the following:
If the Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor - G578- is being replaced,
then it must be adapted using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

4 Driver Assistance Systems Front

Camera
⇒ “4.1 Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera, Removing and
4.1 Driver Assistance Systems Front Cam‐

era, Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the mirror base cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 68 ; Rearview Mirror; Overview - Rearview Mirror .
– Unclip the Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera - R242-
-2- in the direction of the -arrow A- from the clamps -1-.
– Remove the Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera - R242-
-1- in the direction of the -arrow B- from the bracket.
Installing
the following:
– Calibrate the Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera -
R242- . Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr.
44 ; Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera; Driver Assis‐
tance Systems Front Camera, Calibrating .
4. Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera 283

5 Cigarette Lighter and Socket

⇒ “5.1 Overview - Converter with Socket, 12 V-230 V”,
page 284
⇒ “5.2 Cigarette Lighter U1 , Removing and Installing”,
page 285
⇒ “5.3 Socket Illumination Bulb L42 , Removing and Installing”,
page 285
⇒ “5.4 Rear Cigarette Lighter Illumination Bulb L32 , Removing
⇒ “5.5 Socket U , Removing and Installing”, page 285
⇒ “5.6 Converter with Socket, 12 V-230 V U13 , Removing and
5.1 Overview - Converter with Socket, 12 V-230 V
1 - Bracket
❑ To mount the Converter
with Socket, 12 V-230 V
- U13-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.6 Converter with
Socket, 12 V-230 V
U13 , Removing and In‐
2 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 4
❑ To secure the Converter
with Socket, 12 V-230 V
- U13- to the bracket
3 - Bolt
❑ 9 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
❑ To secure the bracket in
the side panel
4 - Converter with Socket, 12
V-230 V - U13-
❑ Must not be opened.
❑ No repairs on the con‐
nector, on the lines and
on the 230 V socket
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.6 Converter with
Socket, 12 V-230 V
U13 , Removing and In‐
5 - Connector
❑ 12-V input voltage

5.2 Cigarette Lighter - U1- , Removing and

Installing
trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 96 ; Cigarette
Lighter and Socket .
5.3 Socket Illumination Bulb - L42- , Remov‐

ing and Installing
5.4 Rear Cigarette Lighter Illumination Bulb

- L32- , Removing and Installing
5.5 Socket - U- , Removing and Installing

5.6 Converter with Socket, 12 V-230 V -

U13- , Removing and Installing
WARNING
There is a danger of electric shock.

♦ The Converter with Socket, 12 V-230 V - U13- housing
contains condensers that can be charged with residual
voltage.
♦ The Converter with Socket, 12 V-230 V - U13- housing
must not be opened under any circumstances.
♦ No repairs may be performed on the harness connector,
on the wires and the 230 V-outlet.
♦ If there is a fault at harness connector, at wires, at 230 V-
socket or in the converter, the complete unit must always
be replaced.
Caution

Removing:
5. Cigarette Lighter and Socket 285

– Remove the right luggage compartment side trim panel. Refer

to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70 ; Luggage Compartment Trim
Panels; Luggage Compartment Side Trim Panel, Removing
and Installing .
– Remove the screws -4 and 5-.
– Remove the Converter with Socket, 12 V-230 V - U13- -2- with
the bracket -3-.
– Remove the Converter with Socket, 12 V-230 V - U13- -1- from

the bracket -2-.
Installing:
♦ Refer to
⇒ “5.1 Overview - Converter with Socket, 12 V-230 V”,
page 284

6 Special Tools
6. Special Tools 287

97 – Wiring
1 Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-
Boxes
⇒ “1.1 Component Location Overview - Relay Carriers, Fuse
Panels and E-Boxes”, page 288
⇒ “1.2 E-Box, Removing and Installing”, page 290
⇒ “1.3 E-Box Relay and Fuse Panels, Removing and Installing”,
page 292
⇒ “1.4 Relay and Fuse Carrier Behind Instrument Panel on Driver
Side, Removing and Installing”, page 294
1.1 Component Location Overview - Relay

Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes
⇒ “1.1.1 Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes”, page 288
⇒ “1.1.2 Relay Carrier and Instrument Panel/A-Pillar Fuse Panel”,
page 290
1.1.1 Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes
1 - Front Cover
❑ For engine compart‐
ment E-box
2 - Nut
❑ 9 Nm
3 - Nut
❑ 9 Nm
4 - Wire
❑ 5 Nm
❑ Coolant fan
5 - Wire
❑ 5 Nm
❑ Terminal 30
6 - Wire
❑ 5 Nm
❑ Electro-mechanical
power steering
7 - Wire
❑ 6 Nm
❑ Battery positive
8 - Wire
❑ 5 Nm
❑ Terminal 30
9 - Wire
❑ 6 Nm
❑ Generator - C-
10 - Fuse Panel A - SA-
288 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

ling. Refer to ⇒ “1.3.2 Fuse Panel A SA , Removing and Installing”, page 293 .
11 - Mounting Bracket
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “1.3.2 Fuse Panel A SA , Removing and Installing”, page 293 .
12 - Cover
❑ For engine compartment E-box
13 - Relay and Fuse Panel B - SB-
❑ With connecting bracket for fuse panel A
⇒ “1.3 E-Box Relay and Fuse Panels, Removing and Installing”, page 292 .
14 - Wire
❑ 6 Nm
15 - Bracket
❑ For Engine Control Module - J623-
16 - Engine Compartment E-Box
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “1.2 E-Box, Removing and Installing”, page 290 .
1. Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes 289

1.1.2 Relay Carrier and Instrument Panel/A-Pillar Fuse Panel
Note
1 - Bracket
❑ For Parking Aid Control
Module - J446- / Parallel
Parking Assistance
ling. Refer to
Control Module J791
2 - Bracket
- J519-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.6 Vehicle Electrical
J519 Bracket, Remov‐
301 .
3 - Fuse Panel C - SC-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Relay and Fuse
Carrier Behind Instru‐
ment Panel on Driver
Side, Removing and In‐
4 - Screw
❑ 3 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
1.2 E-Box, Removing and Installing

Removing
– Remove the Engine Control Module - J623- and set it aside
with the connectors attached. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 23 ; Engine
Control Module; Engine Control Module - J623- , Removing
and Installing or ⇒ Rep. Gr. 24 ; Engine Control Module; En‐
gine Control Module - J623- , Removing and Installing .

– Push the release button in direction of -arrows-.

– Remove the engine compartment E-box cover -1-.
– Release the mounting tab -2- with a screwdriver, and remove

the front cover -1- upward in direction of -arrow-.
– Cut the lower cable ties on the wiring harness.
– Release the retainers -1, 2 and 4- -arrow- and remove the fuse
panel B -3- and set it aside.
– Remove the nuts -arrows- and remove the Engine Control
Module - J623- -1- bracket.
– Release the mounting tab -3- and disengage the engine com‐
partment E-box -2- from the threaded pin.

– Remove the engine compartment E-box upward.

Installing
♦ Refer to
⇒ “1.1.1 Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes”,
page 288
1.3 E-Box Relay and Fuse Panels, Remov‐

ing and Installing
⇒ “1.3.1 Fuse Panel B SB , Removing and Installing”,
page 292
⇒ “1.3.2 Fuse Panel A SA , Removing and Installing”,
page 293
1.3.1 Fuse Panel B - SB- , Removing and In‐

stalling
Removing
– Press the release buttons in direction of -arrow- and remove
the cover -1- for the engine compartment E-box.
– Release the mounting tab -2- with a screwdriver, and remove

the front cover -1- upward in direction of -arrow-.
– For reinstallation, mark the wires at the bolted connections.

– Remove the nuts -1, 2, 4, 5 and 6-.

– Free up the wire -arrow-.
– Cut the lower cable ties on the wiring harness.
– Release the retainers -1, 2 and 4- in direction of -arrow-, re‐

move the Fuse Panel B - SB- -3- and set it aside.
Installing
the following:
– Attach and tighten the wires according to the markings on
Fuse Panel A - SA- .
♦ Refer to
⇒ “1.1.1 Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes”,
page 288
1.3.2 Fuse Panel A - SA- , Removing and In‐

stalling
Removing
– Remove the Fuse Panel B - SB- . Refer to
⇒ “1.3 E-Box Relay and Fuse Panels, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 292 .
– Remove the mounting bracket -4- upward from the Fuse Panel
B - SB- .
– Release the mounting tab -1- in direction of -arrow- and fuse
panel A -2- downward from the fuse panel B -3-.
Installing

1.4 Relay and Fuse Carrier Behind Instru‐

ment Panel on Driver Side, Removing
and Installing
Removing
– Remove the instrument panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 70 ; Instrument Panel; Instrument Panel, Removing and
Installing .
– Release the mounting tab -2 and 4- -A arrows-.
– Remove fuse panel C -3- to the rear from the bracket -1-
-arrow B-.
– Remove the wires.
The exact assignment can be found the applicable wiring dia‐
gram. Refer to ⇒ Wiring diagrams, Troubleshooting & Component
locations.
Note
Take photos of the alignment.
Installing

2 Control Modules
⇒ “2.1 Component Location Overview - Control Modules”,
page 295
⇒ “2.2 Overview - Control Modules”, page 298
⇒ “2.3 Overview - Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface”, page
299
⇒ “2.4 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 , Removing
⇒ “2.5 Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface J533 , Removing
⇒ “2.6 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 Bracket,
⇒ “2.7 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 Bracket,
Replacing”, page 302
⇒ “2.8 Parking Aid Control Module J446 / Parallel Parking As‐
sistance Control Module J791 Bracket, Removing and Installing”,
page 302
2.1 Component Location Overview - Control

Modules
⇒ “2.1.1 Component Location Overview - Front Control Modules”,
page 295
⇒ “2.1.2 Component Location Overview - Rear Control Modules”,
page 297
2.1.1 Component Location Overview - Front Control Modules
Note
2. Control Modules 295

1 - Data Bus On Board Diag‐

nostic Interface - J533-
⇒ “2.3 Overview - Data
Bus On Board Diagnos‐
tic Interface”,
page 299 .
2 - Bracket
trol Modules”,
page 298 .
trol Modules”,
page 298 .
4 - Bracket
⇒ “9.1.2 Overview -
Rear Parking Aid, Se‐
dan”, page 199 .
- J446- / Parallel Parking As‐
sistance Control Module -
J791-
⇒ “9.1 Overview - Park‐
ing Aid”, page 197 .
face - J965-
❑ Component location
overview. Refer to
⇒ “7.1 Component Lo‐
cation Overview - Access/Start Authorization System”, page 166 .
7 - Headlamp Range Control Module - J431- / Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range Control Module - J745-
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒ “11.1 Overview - Automatic Headlamp Range Control”, page 209 .

2.1.2 Component Location Overview - Rear Control Modules
1 - Auxiliary Engine Coolant

Heater Radio Frequency Re‐
ceiver - R149-
ling. Refer to ⇒ Heating,
Ventilation and Air Con‐
ditioning.; Rep. Gr. 82 ;
Additional Components
for Control and Regula‐
tion; Auxiliary Engine
Coolant Heater Radio
Frequency Receiver -
R149- Removing and
Installing
2 - Mobile Communication 2-
Way Signal Amplifier - J984-
ling. Refer to ⇒ Com‐
munication; Rep. Gr.
91 ; Telephone System;
Component Location
Overview - Telephone
System .
3 - Engine Sound Generator
❑ Not installed
4 - Bolt
❑ Not installed
5 - Electronic Damping Control
Module - J250-
Suspension, Wheels,
Electronic Damping;
Overview - Electronic
Damping .
6 - Towing Recognition Control Module - J345-
⇒ “12.3 Towing Recognition Control Module J345 , Removing and Installing”, page 215 .

2.2 Overview - Control Modules

- J446- / Parallel Parking As‐
sistance Control Module -
J791-
❑ With parking aid: Park‐
ing Aid Control Module -
J446-
⇒ “9.1 Overview - Park‐
ing Aid”, page 197 .
❑ With parallel parking as‐
sist: Parallel Parking As‐
- J791-
⇒ “10.1 Overview - Par‐
allel Parking Assist”,
page 206 .
2 - Bracket
❑ For Parking Aid Control
Module - J446- / Parallel
Parking Assistance
ling. Refer to
Control Module J791
3 - Bracket
- J519-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.6 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 Bracket, Removing and Installing”, page 301 .
4 - Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519-
⇒ “2.4 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 , Removing and Installing”, page 299 .
5 - Guide
❑ For the center connector

2.3 Overview - Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface
1 - Connector
❑ For Data Bus On Board
Diagnostic Interface -
J533-
2 - Data Bus On Board Diag‐
nostic Interface - J533-
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.5 Data Bus On
Board Diagnostic Inter‐
face J533 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 300 .
3 - Bolt
tion. Refer to ⇒ Body
Instrument Panel Cen‐
tral Tube; Overview - In‐
strument Panel Central
Tube .
4 - Crash Bracket
Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
70 ; Instrument Panel
Central Tube; Overview
- Instrument Panel Cen‐
tral Tube .
5 - Instrument Panel Central
Tube
2.4 Vehicle Electrical System Control Mod‐

ule - J519- , Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the A-pillar lower trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70 ; Passenger Compartment Trim; A-Pillar Trim
Panel, Removing and Installing .

– Release and disconnect the connectors -1, 2, and 3-.

– To disconnect the connector press the circlip -1-.
– Pivot the retaining bracket in direction of -arrow- and remove

the connector.
– Release the springs -arrow-, pivot the Vehicle Electrical Sys‐

tem Control Module - J519- -4- out of the bracket -5- and
remove downward.
Installing
2.5 Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface

- J533- , Removing and Installing

Removing
– Release the connector -1- and disconnect, to do this grasp
upward behind the pedal bracket.
– To disconnect the connector press the circlip and remove the
connector.
– Release the retainers in direction of -arrows-.
– Remove the Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface - J533-
-3- downward from the bracket -2-.
Installing

ule - J519- Bracket, Removing and In‐
stalling
Removing
– Remove the instrument panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 70 ; Instrument Panel; Instrument Panel, Removing and
Installing .
– Cut the cable tie -arrow-.
– Disengage the fuse panel C and press aside. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Relay and Fuse Carrier Behind Instrument Panel on
Driver Side, Removing and Installing”, page 294 .
– Release and disconnect the connector from the Front Parking
Aid Warning Buzzer - H22- .
– Release and disconnect the connector on the Vehicle Electri‐
cal System Control Module - J519- . Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 , Re‐
– Release and disconnect the connector on the Parking Aid
Control Module - J446- / Parallel Parking Assistance Control
Module - J791- .
– Remove the diagnostic connector, to do this release the lock‐
ing mechanism on the bracket and remove the bracket out‐
ward.

– Remove the bolts -2, 3, and 6-.

– Push the bracket -1- as far as possible out of the central tube
until the alignment pins -4- and -5- are disengaged.
– Cut the cable ties -arrows-.
– Free up the wiring harness on the mount.
– Remove the bracket to the vehicle interior.
Installing
Bracket for Vehicle Electrical 4.5 Nm
System Control Module - J519-
to central tube

ule - J519- Bracket, Replacing
Removing
– Remove the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519-
bracket. Refer to
⇒ “2.6 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 Brack‐
et, Removing and Installing”, page 301 .
– Remove the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module -
J519- . Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 , Re‐
– Remove the Parking Aid Control Module - J446- / Parallel
Parking Assistance Control Module - J791- . Refer to
– Remove the Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H22- . Refer
to
⇒ “9.3 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H22 , Removing and
Installing
2.8 Parking Aid Control Module - J446- /

Parallel Parking Assistance Control
Module - J791- Bracket, Removing and
Installing
♦ Feeler Gauge
Removing

– If equipped: remove the Parking Aid Control Module - J446- /

Parallel Parking Assistance Control Module - J791- . Refer to
– To loosen the retainers, insert a 0.9 mm feeler gauge -2- be‐
hind the opening -arrow- as illustrated.
– Remove the bracket -1- from below from the Vehicle Electrical
System Control Module - J519- -3- bracket.
Installing

3 Connectors
⇒ “3.1 Wiring Harnesses and Connectors, Repairing”,
page 304
3.1 Wiring Harnesses and Connectors, Re‐

pairing
⇒ “3.1.1 Electric Wiring Harnesses and Connectors, Repairing”,
page 304
⇒ “3.1.2 Connector Housings and Connectors, Repairing”,
page 304
3.1.1 Electric Wiring Harnesses and Connec‐

tors, Repairing
trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 97 ; Connectors .
3.1.2 Connector Housings and Connectors,

Repairing

4 Connector Housings, Releasing and

Disassembling
4. Connector Housings, Releasing and Disassembling 305

5 Antenna Wires, Repairing


6 Fiber-Optic Cable
6. Fiber-Optic Cable 307

7 Vehicle Diagnostic Tester

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 97 ; Vehicle
Diagnostic Tester .

8 Revision History
DRUCK NUMBER: K0059241521
Fac‐ Edit Job Fe Notes Quality
tory Edi‐ Type ed‐ Checke
Edi‐ tion ba d By
tion ck
12.2 1/15/ Fac‐ Added MRPs and deleted Jim H

015 2016 tory tool names from text.
Up‐
date
02.2 08/2 Edit‐ Tom P
015 8/20 ing
15 Re‐
view
02.2 07/3 Lo‐ 11 Note added to Headlamp, Tom P
015 0/20 cal 11 Removing and Installing
15 Fac‐ 87 chapter. Reference to full
tory 6 bumper cover removal only
Feed when removing both head‐
back light assemblies.
02.2 05/1 Lo‐ 10 Correction to negative bat‐ Tom P
015 1/20 cal 96 tery cable torques specifica‐
15 Fac‐ 29 tions until factory update is
tory 7 provided.
Feed
back
02.2 03/2 Fac‐ N/ Eric P
015 4/20 tory A
15 Up‐
date
01/1 Lo‐ Ch 1070575 Tom P
2/20 cal an
15 Feed ge
back d
win
der
wa
sh
ers
to
wip
ers
wh
ere
ap‐
pli‐
ca‐
ble
4/21/ Fac‐ N/ Jim H
2014 tory A
New
8. Revision History 309

VW Golf 2015 Electrical Equipment Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VW Golf 2015 Electrical Equipment Eng

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VW Golf 2015 Electrical Equipment Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service

Service Department. Technical Information

00 - General, Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1.1 Overview - Windshield Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

94 - Exterior Lights, Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

8.5 Steering Column Switch Module, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

96 - Interior Lights, Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info Contents v

5.3 Socket Illumination Bulb L42 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

00 – General, Technical Data

1.1 Start/Stop System Safety Precautions

Danger of personal injury because the engine can start auto‐

1.2 Safety Precautions, Road Test with

Distraction and inadequately secured measuring equipment

1.3 HID Headlamps Usage and Safety Pre‐

Life-threatening danger due to high voltage.

Risk of injury from burning, UV rays, blinding and explosion.

2 Rep. Gr.00 - General, Technical Data

♦ Do not touch HID headlamp bulb glass cones with bare

2.1 Contact Corrosion

2.2 Wire Routing and Securing

4 Rep. Gr.00 - General, Technical Data

3.1 Battery, General Information

3.2 Battery Types

27 – Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

1.1 Overview - Battery

6 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

1.2 Battery, Removing and Installing

Pay attentions when working on the battery to the warning

– Open the cover -4- over the battery negative terminal.

– Remove the Battery - A- -3- in the direction of travel from the

If the battery is not secured properly, the following risks can

Only maintenance-free batteries conforming to standards

8 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

– Install the bracket -1-.

1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting

Follow all safety precautions when working on pyrotechnic

– Release and disconnect the connector -2- from the Battery

After connecting the power supply, the ASR/ESP Indicator Lamp

1.4 Battery Tray, Removing and Installing

10 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

– Free up the wiring harness from the battery tray -arrows-.

– Remove the bolts and nut -2-.

1.5 Battery, Checking

1.6 Battery, Charging

1.7 Ground Cable with Battery Monitoring

– Release and disconnect the connector -2- from the Battery

– Remove the nut -1- for the ground cable -2-.

1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module -

12 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

2.1 Overview - Generator

2.1.1 Overview - Generator without Bushings

2.1.2 Overview - Generator with Bushings

14 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing

2.2.1 Generator, Removing and Installing,

Danger of damaging the A/C compressor, the refrigerant line

– Remove the A/C compressor from the bracket. Refer to ⇒